Sie sind auf Seite 1von 314

TECHNICAL MANUAL

Technical Manual
EN code 66 80 012

MAIN CONTENTS

PART 0: PREFACE
PART 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PART 2: INSTALLATION
PART 3: ACCEPTANCE
PART 4: ADJUSTMENTS
PART 5: MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual
issued on 01/06/12

series 01

Each part is preceded by its own list of contents, with an indication of the date on
which each paragraph was last revised.

MAIN CONTENTS
code 66 80 012 - Mti 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Part 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CONTENTS

pages rev. date

CONTENTS I-1 to I-2 0 01/06/12

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EM EQUIPMENT 1.1 to 1.21 0 01/06/12


1.1 Composition of the EM equipment
1.1.1 Composition of the versions with SBFM video
memory
1.1.2 Composition of the DIP340 video processor
versions
1.1.3 Stand
1.1.4 Monitor unit
1.2 Applications and modes
1.2.1 DIP340 video processor versions
1.2.2 SBFM video memory versions
1.3 Safety
1.3.1 Introduction
1.3.2 Safety procedures
1.3.2.1 Mechanical safety
1.3.2.2 Electrical safety
1.3.2.3 Equipotential earth connector
1.3.2.4 Laser beams
1.3.2.5 Protection against ionising radiation
1.3.3 Residual risks
1.3.4 Scrapping the EM equipment
1.3.5 Warnings
1.3.5.1 Symbols used
1.3.5.2 Warnings and alarm messages on the
touch screen panel
1.3.6 Manufacturer’s guidelines and statement
1.3.6.1 Electromagnetic emissions
1.3.6.2 Electromagnetic immunity
1.3.6.3 Recommended separation distances

2 TECHNICAL DATA 2.1 to 2.34 0 01/06/12


2.1 Device Class
2.2 Technical characteristics
2.2.1 Mechanical/Electrical data
2.2.2 Imaging system
2.2.2.1 Versions 1, 2 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.2.2 Versions 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.2.3 Versions 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.3 Exposure modes
2.2.3.1 Versions 1, 3 (see table 1 on preface

revision 0 PART 1 page I-1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

chapter)
2.2.3.2 Versions 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.3.3 Version 5 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.3.4 Version 6 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.4 mAs table
2.2.5 kV/mA correlation
2.2.5.1 Versions 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.5.2 Versions 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.5.3 Version 6 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.6 Dosage information
2.2.6.1 Indications
2.2.6.2 Reference Air Kerma Rate
Versions 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.6.3 Reference Air Kerma Rate
Versions 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.6.4 Reference Air Kerma Rate
Version 6 (see table 1 on preface
chapter)
2.2.7 Optional modules
2.2.7.1 Dose Area Meter
2.2.7.2 Laser localiser
2.2.7.3 Medicap USB200
(video memory versions only)
2.3 Fuses
2.4 Overall dimensions and weights
2.4.1 Overall dimensions and weight of the monitor
unit
2.4.1.1 Version for SBFM video memory
2.4.1.2 Version for SBFM video memory +
Medicap
2.4.1.3 Version for DIP340 video processor
2.4.1.4 Monitor rotation
2.4.2 Overall dimensions and weight of the stand
2.4.2.1 9” version with fixed anode
2.4.2.2 9” version with rotating anode
2.4.2.3 12” version with rotating anode
2.5 Focal spot position
2.5.1 9” version with fixed anode
2.5.2 9” version with rotating anode
2.5.3 12” version with rotating anode
2.6 Dispersed radiation in significant zone of occupancy
2.6.1 Version 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

3 STORAGE AND HANDLING 3.1 to 3.1 0 01/06/12


3.1 Packaging
3.2 Storage

revision 0 PART 1 page I-2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EM EQUIPMENT

1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE EM EQUIPMENT

The electro-medical (EM) equipment comes in various versions, the main difference
e being the image
acquisition device installed:
- Versions with VIDEO MEMORY (SBFM) ,
- Versions with VIDEO PROCESSOR (DIP340).

1.1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE VERSIONS WITH VIDEO MEMORY

1 Stand
2 X-ray footswitch
3 Monitor station

1 Stand

3 Monitor Unit

2 Footswitch

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.1.2 COMPOSITION OF THE VERSIONS WITH VIDEO PROCESSOR

1 Stand
2 X-ray footswitch
3 Monitor unit
4 Remote control

1 Stand

4 Remote Control

2 Footswitch

3 Monitor Unit

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.1.3 STAND

1 Control panel
2 X-ray monoblock
3 Collimator ; Dose Area Meter (optional)
4 I.I. tube
5 TV camera with CCD sensor
6 Table containing: Control Unit
X-ray generator inverter
Column movement motor
Rear wheel rotation mechanism
Power transformers
7 C-arm sliding grip
8 C-arm sliding brake
9 C-arm rotation brake
10 Horizontal C-arm positioning brake
11 Horizontal C-arm movement grip
12 “Wig-wag” angle brake
13 Guide knob (±90°) for rear wheels and stand parking brake control
14 Handles for moving the stand
15 X-ray command button
16 Emergency button
17 Stand / monitor unit connector
18 Footswitch cable connector
19 Equipotential earth connector
20 Laser light localiser (optional)

7 14 11 12 9
5

20
A

10 17 6 15 18 19

16

13
1.1.4 STAZIONE VISIVA
View from A

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc Fig. 2
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Versions with VIDEO MEMORY:

1. Work Monitor (W.M.), for viewing live images and the last image acquired (LIH)
2. Reference monitor (R.M.), for viewing saved images
3. ON/OFF key
4. SBFM video memory
5. Printer compartment (optional)
6. Power unit
7. Parking brakes
8. Monitor orientation handles
9. Monitor orientation locking handle
10. Emergency stop button
11. X-ray warning light
12. Steering handles
13. Cable support
14. Magnetothermal switch
15. Power cable
16. Stand cable

1 8

2 9

3 10

4 11

5 12

6 13

14
7

15

16

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Versions with VIDEO PROCESSOR:

1. Work Monitor (W.M.), for viewing live images, the last image acquired (LIH) and the images saved to
HD in the video processor
2. Reference monitor (R.M.), for viewing saved images
3. ON/OFF key
4. Touch-pad keyboard
5. Infrared remote control sensor
6. CD/DVD burner
7. USB socket for extracting saved images
8. DIP340 video processor Power unit
9. Printer compartment
10. Power unit
11. Parking brakes
12. Monitor orientation handles
13. Monitor orientation locking handle
14. Ethernet cable connector
15. Emergency stop button
16. X-ray warning light
17. Steering handles
18. Cable support
19. Infrared remote control
20. Magnetothermal switch
21. Power cable
22. Stand cable

1 12

2 13

3 14

4 15

5 16

6 17

7 18

8 19

9 20

10 21

11 22

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.2 APPLICATIONS AND MODES

The equipment allows for acquisition of X-ray images in the following modes:

- CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY
- LOW mA CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY
- HIGH mA CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY (BOOSTED)
- PULSED FLUOROSCOPY
- “ONE SHOT” FLUOROSCOPY
- FLUOROSCOPY WITH AUTOMATIC SAVING TO HD (*)
- SUBTRACTIVE ANGIO FLUOROSCOPY (*)
- ROAD MAPPING (*)
- CASETTE RADIOGRAPHY.

(*) VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only.

The image processing functions vary: see User Manual for full details.
See Chapter “Technical Data” below for full details of the technical data and characteristics.

1.2.1 VERSIONS WITH VIDEO PROCESSOR

a) Acquisition

- Acquisition in continuous fluoroscopy mode, including high mA (boosted fluoro).


- Reduction of quantic noise via recursive filter and shift-sensitive filter.
- Automatic saving to HD at set intervals.
- Last image hold on monitor (LIH).
- Acquisition of max opacification images.
- Acquisition in subtractive and road mapping modes.
- Digital image rotation.

b) Post-processing

- Management of patient and hospital data.


- Brightness and contrast control.
- Edge enhancement.
- Reverse polarity.
- Virtual collimators on monitor.
- Cine loop.
- Digital zoom.
- Multi-image display (max 16 images).
- Angle and distance measurement.
- Text.
- Electronic collimators.
- Mask pick-up and image subtraction.

1.2.2 VERSIONS WITH VIDEO MEMORY

- Acquisition in continuous fluoroscopy mode, including high mA (boosted fluoro).


- Reduction of quantic noise via recursive filter.
- Last image hold on monitor (LIH).
- Saving to temporary memory (RAM) of 1 image (SBFM76/0) or 110 images (SBFM76/110).
- Saving of images or films to USB flash drive using the Medicap USB200 module (OPTIONAL).

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3 SAFETY

1.3.1 INTRODUCTION

The EM equipment must be used solely in accordance with the safety instructions contained in this manual
and must never be used for purposes other than those for which it is intended.

Attention:

The equipment must only be used by personnel with proper knowledge of radiation protection
and full training in the use of X-ray equipment.

The EM equipment must always be manned when switched on.

The equipment must not be used if there are any electrical, mechanical or radiological failures.
Likewise, it must not be used in the event of a faulty alarm or signal.

Prior authorisation must be obtained in writing from ATS before making any modifications to this
equipment or its safety system.

Never remove any parts or covers, as this could compromise the equipment’s electromagnetic
compatibility.

If you wish to use the equipment in combination with other devices, components or modules
whose compatibility is not certain, you must make sure that there are no risks for patients or
operators. Consult the manufacturer of the device in question or an expert.

As with any technical apparatus, the X-ray equipment must be used in a proper manner and
receive regular checks and maintenance as specified in the "Maintenance" section of this
manual.

The monoblock may reach a temperature close to 60 °C after prolonged use. Do not touch the
monoblock or move it near the patient.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.2 SAFETY PROCEDURES

1.3.2.1 MECHANICAL SAFETY

Attention:

After positioning the equipment, apply the parking brakes.

Only use the special steering handles to move the equipment.

Avoid knocks.

Never remove the guards unless for the maintenance operations expressly foreseen by and
described in this manual.

1.3.2.2 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Attention:

Never use the EM equipment in potentially explosive environments.

Never use the EM equipment in oxygen-rich environments

Unplug the equipment from the mains before cleaning, disinfecting and sterilizing it.

Cleaning products and disinfectants can form explosive gas mixtures. Therefore, only use
products that comply with the relevant safety regulations.

Take care not to spill conducting liquids on the equipment as these could infiltrate and so
damage the equipment and render it unsafe to use.

Protection against electric shock is provided by an earth connection (EM equipment, class I).
Make sure that the electrical plant to which the EM equipment is connected is properly
earthed in compliance with current laws and regulations.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

If the equipment suddenly malfunctions, use the emergency button (on the monitor unit or the
stand, as shown in the figure) to stop it and prevent the emission of X-rays.

Always switch the equipment off after use. When in use, always switch the equipment off using
the OFF key on the stand.
To switch the system off completely, use the key switch on the monitor stand, but only after
switching the stand off first.

Unplug at the mains only after first switching the system off using the key switch on the monitor
unit.
If the power cable becomes damaged, carefully remove it (holding it by the plug) and replace
with a new one from the manufacturer.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.2.3 EQUIPOTENTIAL EARTH CONNECTOR

For maximum patient and medical staff safety, the patient bed must
be earthed using the equipotential earth connector on the stand.
Use a cable with a Multi-Contact POAG-K4 or POAG-K6 connector to
connect this (see detail in figure below).

The equipotential earth connector must not be used for connection to the EARTH.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.2.4 LASER RADIATION

In order to centre the X-ray beam, the equipment uses 2 laser beam centring devices (optional) with class
1M laser diodes (optional) placed on the I.I. tube.

Never look directly at the laser beam through a lens.


Beware that the laser beam may be reflected by surgical instruments or other accessories used
during an operation.

A special warning plate (see figure) is fixed on the I.I. tube near the flange containing the two centring
devices, in the position shown in the figure below.

The laser diodes used are class 1M laser diodes (IEC/EN standard 60825-1 Ed.2).

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.2.5 IONISING RADIATION PROTECTION

The EM equipment emits ionising radiation for medical purposes.

X-ray equipment can be harmful if not used in a proper manner.


These instructions must therefore be read in full and fully understood before the equipment can be used.

The use of this device involves two types of exposure to ionising radiation:
occupational, for operators
diagnostic, for patients being scanned.

Even though the equipment provides a high standard of protection against X-rays, beyond the actual
beam, no occupational measure can guarantee total protection. The operator must, therefore, take all
the necessary safety precautions to avoid the risk of exposure, to himself and others, arising from incorrect
or excessive exposure to radiation.

All operators must receive suitable training and adopt all necessary safety measures to avoid the risk of
harm.
The equipment is sold on the following condition (clause in the sale contract): the Manufacturer, its agents
and representatives cannot be held liable for any loss or injury that may be caused by improper use of the
equipment.

Before carrying out any exposure, make sure that all the necessary radiation protections have
been activated.
During X-ray use, the personnel present in the X-ray room must observe the radiation protection
regulations in force.

Always provide patients with the necessary radiation protection.

Use suitable personal radio-protective equipment. A radio-protective material equivalent to


0.35 mm of lead gives 99.95% protection against radiation of 50 kV and 94.5% protection
against radiation of 100 kV.

Below are examples of such personal radio-protective equipment:

Protective aprons
for operators

Protective aprons for patients

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Head protection for operators

Thyroid protection for operators

Scrotum protection for


male patients

Ovary protection
for female patients

Distance is the best protection against radiation: always keep as far away from the source of
the X-rays and the exposure objective as possible.
Use the manual switch at least 2 m from the X-ray beam to protect yourself further from the risk
of dispersed radiation.
Accordingly, the coiled cable of the manual switch is about 4 long when fully extended.

Always set the smallest exposure field possible by closing the collimator shutters/iris. In fact,
dispersed radiation depends to a large extent on the volume of the irradiated object.

Avoid moving or remaining within the X-ray trajectory.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Use the largest possible skin-focussing distance to minimise the dose absorbed by the patient.

The dose values for the patient shown above (distance from focus = 100 cm and 50 cm) are:

2
⎛ 50cm ⎞
dose" A" = ⎜ ⎟ × dose" B"
⎝ 100cm ⎠
For example, if a patient at a distance of 50 cm from the focus receives a dose of 250uGy (dose “B”), when
that distance becomes 100 cm the received dose is:

2
⎛ 50cm ⎞
dose" A" = ⎜ ⎟ × 250uGy = 62,5uGy
⎝ 100cm ⎠

During every exposure, always make sure that the edge of the iris collimator is visible on the
image: if it is not possible to collimate this correctly, call the ATS Technical Service as there is the
risk that the collimator is not working and remains open at an excessive value.

Make sure that there are no materials within the X-ray beam that could diminish the intensity of
the X-rays and so lead to sub-standard images.
For example, the patient bed must conform to standard EN60601-2-54 table 203.104 (equivalent
aluminium filtration less than 2.3mm).

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.3 RESIDUAL RISKS

The EM equipment has been designed and built in full respect of the safety regulations.
Nevertheless, there are still some risks involved in the use of this equipment if it is used incorrectly or the
prescribed safety measures are faulty.

With regard to risks due to improper use of the EM equipment, see the instructions and recommendations
above.

Note also that:

• Patients or operators may be harmed by uncontrolled movement of the monitor unit or the stand due
to excessively fast movement or steep surfaces.
- Never allow the monitor unit or the stand to pick up too much speed during movement.
- Never move the monitor unit or the stand on stairs or inclined surfaces with a gradient of more
than 10°.
- When moving the stand or monitor unit, avoid all obstacles on the ground (e.g. cables and
steps.

• The stand and monitor unit have been tested for stability during movement on inclined surfaces (up to
10° and all other positions on slopes of up to 5°.
- Never use the stand or monitor unit on surfaces with an incline of more than 5° (or 10° during
transit).
- Never try to move the stand or monitor unit when their brakes are engaged.

• In the case of uncontrolled movement of the C-arm, the mechanical structure may hit the patient or
operators.
- Keep the movement of the C-arm under control at all times.

• The monoblock may overheat after continuous and prolonged use of the equipment.
- Never cover the surfaces of the monoblock with material that prevents heat dispersion.

• Inflammable gases may be ignited by electric arcs due to the operation of electrical components.
- Never use the equipment in the presence of anaesthetics or other inflammable products.
- Check that there is a fire extinguisher in the room where the equipment is to be used and that
this is efficient.

With regard to residual risks due to faults in the prescribed safety measures, note that:

• Protection against electric shocks is provided by means of an efficient earth system for all metal parts
covering the equipment.
The full earth circuit (for both internal and external parts and the mains supply) should therefore
be checked for efficiency on a regular basis (see the "Routine Maintenance" schedule
described in this manual).

• If the LCD monitor screen is hit hard enough, it could break and scatter liquid crystal, which is toxic.
- Avoid hitting the monitor with any objects.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

• The column that raises the monoblock C-arm is motorised.


- If the motor responsible for moving the column is accidentally powered up, the operator should
immediately push the emergency button placed on the stand or on the monitor unit.

• If smoke is seen or unusual noises are heard:


- Switch the equipment off immediately and unplug at the mains.

• To control the residual risk of X-ray emission in the event of a system fault or incorrect adjustment, we
recommend checking the dose level every day, immediately after switching on the equipment
and before using it on patients (details of this test are given in paragraph 2.7).

1.3.4 SCRAPPING THE EM EQUIPMENT

Once the EM equipment reaches the end of its useful life, dispose of all its components in accordance with
the European Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).

Some parts of the EM equipment are built using hazardous materials, such as lead.

All flat batteries must be disposed of in accordance with European Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).

See chapter 4 in Part 5 of this manual for further details.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.5 WARNINGS

1.3.5.1 SYMBOLS USED

Symbols are used on the equipment and serial n° plate, as follows:

Caution: read the accompanying documents before use


Note: This symbol, on the stand control panel, draws your attention to the absolute
need to adhere to the instructions in this manual when using the equipment.

Laser localiser present

Live parts

Potentially harmful physiological effects

Potentially harmful physiological effects

Equipotential pole

X-ray focus position

Risk of crushed hands

Reference index

Switch open

Switch closed

Brake off

Brake on

Wheels in normal position

Wheels ready for sideways movement

Radiography

Continuous fluoroscopy

HCF pulsed fluoroscopy

Fluoroscopy with saving to HD

One shot fluoroscopy

Equipment to be disposed of in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC


requirements (“WEEE” - Handling of waste electrical and electronic equipment).

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.5.2 STATUS AND ALARM MESSAGES ON THE TOUCH SCREEN PANEL

Messages
status and alarms

MESSAGE MEANING ACTION


WAIT… System asks you to wait Wait…

READY System ready for X-ray emission in continuous


/ pulsed / one-shot / radiography mode
RAD PREPARATION Preparing for radiography

READY FOR RAD RAD preparation completed

RADIOGRAPHY X-ray emission in radiography mode

FLUOROSCOPY X-ray emission in continuous fluoroscopy


mode, with normal mA
PULSED FLUOROSCOPY X-ray emission in pulsed fluoroscopy mode,
with normal mA
ONE SHOT X-ray emission in one-shot fluoroscopy mode

LOW mA X-ray emission (fluoroscopy) with low mA, The normal mA value is automatically
depending on temperature of the X-ray tube reset as the temperature of the X-ray
or X-ray monoblock tube or monoblock falls
BOOSTED X-ray emission (fluoroscopy) with high mA, for
the time set on the equipment
FLUOROSCOPY PEDAL Continuous fluoroscopy footswitch error: Call Technical Service.
CLOSED already “on” when system switched on.
PULSED PEDAL CLOSED Pulsed fluoroscopy footswitch error: already Call Technical Service.
“on” when system switched on.
1-SHOT PEDAL CLOSED One-shot fluoroscopy footswitch error: Call Technical Service.
already “on” when system switched on.
X-RAY BUTTON CLOSED X-ray command footswitch error: already Call Technical Service.
“on” when system switched on.
LOW DOSE AT MAX kV No image is detected when using the max kV Reboot system and give exposure
setting. command (without patient).
Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
kV ERROR I.I. tube voltage during exposure fails to reach Reboot system and give exposure
the set value. command (without patient).
Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
SET kV ERROR The kV setting supplied by the X-ray generator Call Technical Service
does not match the value shown on the
control panel (10% outside tolerance)

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

MESSAGE MEANING ACTION


mA TOO LOW mA value too low during radiography Check mains voltage.
exposure (below 10 mA). Call Technical Service if the problem
persists.
mA value below 0.1 mA for more than 10
seconds during exposure in continuous
fluoroscopy mode.

mA value below 0.3 mA during exposure in


pulsed HCF fluoroscopy mode

INVERTER FAULTY Generic X-ray generator inverter error Reboot system and give exposure
command (without patient).
Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
TIMER FAULTY Malfunction in the main controller clock in the Call Technical Service.
equipment
DOSE CONTROL FAULTY Malfunction in the X-ray dose reading circuit Call Technical Service.
EEPROM FAULTY Malfunction in the permanent memory of the Call Technical Service.
main controller in the equipment
FILAMENT OFF Problem with the circuit that switches on the Reboot system.
X-ray tube. Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
VIDEOP. NOT READY No response from the video processor Reboot system and give exposure
PRONTO command (without patient).
No response from the video memory Call Technical Service if the alarm
MEMORY NOT READY persists.
TV CAMERA OFFLINE TV camera not communicating with the main Reboot system.
controller in the equipment Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
THERMAL SAFETY DEVICE The over-temperature thermal safety device Wait for the X-ray monoblock to cool
in the X-ray monoblock has tripped down.
CG-uP376 +24V FAULTY Problem in the main controller power circuits Reboot system.
in the equipment Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
CG-RKMC +15V FAULTY Problem in the main controller power circuits Reboot system.
in the equipment Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
CG-RKMC -15V FAULTY Problem in the main controller power circuits Reboot system.
in the equipment Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
CG-RKMC +24V FAULTY Problem in the main controller power circuits Reboot system.
in the equipment Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
NO X-RAYS No X-ray emission detected after giving the X- Reboot system and give exposure
ray command command (without patient).
Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
MANUAL X-RAY STOP The radiography command button has been Assess image quality and repeat
released before exposure has ended. exposure if necessary.
MAX RADIOGRAPHY TIME Radiography exposure has been interrupted Probably due to a big dip in the mains
by the max admissible exposure time-out (5’’) voltage during exposure.
Assess image quality and repeat
exposure if necessary, increasing the
kV.
MAX FLUOROSCOPY TIME Fluoroscopy exposure has been interrupted Reset fluoroscopy timer.
by the accumulated fluoroscopy timer.
COLLIMATOR FAULT The collimator is not connected, incorrectly
connected or does not function properly.
The nominal I.I. tube zoom is automatically Call Technical Service.
selected.
X-ray exposure is permitted in order to finish
the operation.
IRIS FAULT The iris has not reached the right position. Call Technical Service if the alarm
persists.
X-RAY TUBE TOO HOT Radiography exposure is not permitted as the Wait for the X-ray tube to cool down.
X-ray tube is too hot.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

MESSAGE MEANING ACTION


DAP FAULTY Problem in the Dose Area Product Call Technical Service.

DAP NOT CONNECTED Dose Area Product not connected Call Technical Service.

MAX DOSE 999999.9 Warning that the max accumulated dose Reset the DAP.
setting (DAP) has been exceeded
STARTER ANODE FAULTY Problem in the rotating anode circuit Call Technical Service.

X-RAY ORDER FAULTY Video processor makes an X-ray emission Call Technical Service.
request at wrong time

1.3.6 MANUFACTURER’S GUIDELINES AND STATEMENT

Never remove any parts or covers as this may compromise the electromagnetic compatibility of
the system.

Caution: Portable and mobile communication devices may affect the efficiency of the device.

1.3.6.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS

Table 1

Manufacturer’s guidelines and statement – electromagnetic emissions

In accordance with EN standard 60601-1-2:2007, the system is intended for use


in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidelines

RF emissions Group 1 The system uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore,
CISPR 11 its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Class A The system is suitable for use in all establishments, excluding
domestic establishments and those directly connected to the
Harmonic emissions Not Applicable public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
EN 61000-3-2 used for domestic purposes.
Voltage fluctuation / flicker Not Applicable
emissions
EN 61000-3-3

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.6.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY

Table 2

Manufacturer’s guidelines and statement – electromagnetic emissions

In accordance with EN standard 60601-1-2:2007, the system is intended for use


in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Test level Electromagnetic environment -


Immunity test Compliance level
EN 60601-1-2 guidelines

Electro-static discharge ±6kV contact ±6kV contact Hospital environment:


(ESD) Floors should be wood, concrete
±8kV air ±8kV air or ceramic tile. If floors are
EN 61000-4-2 covered with synthetic material,
the relative humidity should be
at least 30%.
Electrical fast transient / ±2kV for power lines ±2kV for power lines Mains power quality should be
burst that of a typical hospital
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output lines environment.
EN 61000-4-4 lines >3 m >3 m
±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality should be
Surge that of a typical hospital
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode environment.
EN 61000-4-5
Voltage dips, short 0% UT for 0.5 cycles 0% UT for 0.5 cycles Mains power quality should be
interruptions and that of a typical hospital
voltage variations on 40% UT for 5 cycles 40% UT for 5 cycles environment.
power supply input
lines 70% UT for 25 cycles 70% UT for 25 cycles

EN 61000-4-11 0% UT for 5 s 0% UT for 5 s


Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m The main power frequency
(50/60Hz) magnetic magnetic fields should have
field levels typical of a hospital
environment.
EN 61000-4-8

Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Table 4

Immunity test Test level Electromagnetic environment -


Compliance level
EN 60601-1-2 guidelines

Cordless and mobile RF


conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms communication devices should
150 kHz - 80 MHz not be used closer to the system,
EN 61000-4-6 including the cables, than the
recommended separation
distance calculated using the
correct equation for the
transmitter frequency.

Recommended separation
distance:
d = 1.2 √P
150 MHz - 80 MHz

d = 1.2 √P
80 MHz - 800 MHz

d = 2.3 √P
800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
irradiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
80 MHz - 2.5 GHz where P is the maximum nominal
EN 61000-4-3 output rate of the transmitter in
Watts according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d
is the recommended separation
distance in metres.

The field intensity for fixed RF


transmitters, as measured during
an electromagnetic survey of
the area, could be less than the
compliance level for each
interval of frequency.

Interference may occur close to


devices marked with the
following symbol:

Note 1: These guidelines might not apply to all situations. Electromagnetic wave propagation is influenced by the
absorption and reflection properties of structures, objects and people.

Note 2: The field intensity for fixed transmitters, such as docking stations for radio telephones (mobile phones and
cordless phones), two-way radio transmitters, pagers, amateur radio devices, AM and FM radio transmitters and TV
transmitters, cannot be determined in theory or to any degree of accuracy. A thorough electromagnetic survey of
the site is required to assess the electromagnetic environment caused by fixed RF transmitters. If the intensity of the
field measured in the room where the system is used exceeds the applicable compliance level indicated above,
you need to monitor the normal functioning of the system carefully. Additional measures may be required in the
case of abnormal performance, such as a different orientation or position for the system or use in a boosted RF
shielded environment enclosure.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.6.3 RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES FOR PORTABLE AND MOBILE RADIO-COMMUNICATION


DEVICES

The system is designed to work in an electromagnetic environment where irradiated RF interference is kept
under control.
The client or system operator can help prevent electromagnetic interference by ensuring a minimum
distance between mobile/portable RF communication devices (transmitters) and the system as indicated
below (with reference to the max output power of the radio-communication devices.

Table 6
Separation distance / Transmitter frequency
Max nominal output
m
power of the transmitter
150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
W
d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
Note 1: In the case of transmitters with a max nominal output rate not indicated above, the recommended
separation distance d (in metres) can be calculated by using the correct equation for the transmitter frequency,
where P is the maximum nominal output rate of the transmitter in Watts according to the transmitter manufacturer.

Note 2: These guidelines might not apply to all situations. Electromagnetic wave propagation is influenced by the
absorption and reflection properties of structures, objects and people.

revision 0 PART 1 page 1.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 01.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2 TECHNICAL DATA

2.1 DEVICE CLASS

Protection against electrical contact: class I

Protection factor (electrical contact): type B

Degree of protection against water penetration: common

Degree of safety in the presence of inflammable gases: not suitable for use in the presence of
inflammable gases
Operating mode: intermittent

2.2 TECHNICAL DETAILS

2.2.1 MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL DATA

9” I.I. tube version 12” I.I. tube version


C ARM:

- Motorised vertical stroke: - stroke 450 mm 400 mm


- speed 1 cm/s 1 cm/s
- Horizontal stroke 200 mm 200 mm
- Wig-wag ± 12° ± 9°
- - Arc rotation around horizontal axis ± 200° ± 200°
- Arc movement 135° 135°
- S.I.D.: fixed anode 1054 mm /
rotary anode 994 mm 930 mm
- Arc depth 662 mm 641 mm

POWER SUPPLY:

- Single-phase voltage 230 V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 16 A


(optional: 120 V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 16 A)

- Line resistance max 0.4 Ohms


- Connector (conforms to IEC 309) 16 A

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

- Storage and moving temperature 0-55 °C / relative humidity 10-80%


- Working temperature 10-40 °C / relative humidity 30-75%

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

Fixed anode versions Rotary anode versions


X-RAY GENERATOR

INVERTER: model: HF1 5kW

- High frequency 40 kHz


- Max voltage 120 kVp
- Conformity EN 60601-1
- Max current for radiography 100 mA
- Max power for radiography @ 100kV Standard radiography: 2.8kW (@ > 5 mAs)
High power radiography: 4kW (@ ≤ 5 mAs)

- Max current for fluoroscopy 5 mA (continuous) 5 mA (continuous)


8 mA (boosted) 10 mA (boosted)
10 mA (one shot) 12 mA (one shot)

Fixed anode version Rotating anode version


MONOBLOCK:

- Model I-40S 3,5 RF I-40R 15 RF


- Max power 4.2 kW 15 kW
- Heat capacity 900 kJ 960 kJ
- Continuous heat dissipation 80 W 85 W
- Total filtering 3.4 mm Al 3.4 mm Al
- Safety overload cutout temperature 60°C ±5°C 60°C ±5°C

Fixed anode Rotating anode


X-RAY TUBE:

- Model OX/110-5 RTM70


- Anode material Tungsten Rhenium/Tungsten/Molybde
num
- Focus small focus: 0.5 mm small focus: 0,3 mm
large focus: 1.5 mm large focus: 0,6 mm
- Anode angle 12° 10°
- Anode heat capacity 40 kJ 225kJ
- Max anode heat dissipation 500 W 750 W
- Nominal anode power small focus: 0.78 kW small focus: 6 kW
large focus: 4.2 kW large focus: 25 kW
- Anode rotation / 3000 rpm (50 Hz)
3600 rpm (60 Hz)

X-RAY COLLIMATOR: model: R605 DASM

- Iris: - continuously adjustable aperture


- automatic adjustment to suit I.I. field
- manual control

- Shutters: - continuously adjustable aperture


- clockwise / anti-clockwise rotation, continuously adjustable
- manual control

- Max X-ray field: 9” I.I. tube version 12” I.I. tube version
(diameter) (diameter)
- Fluoroscopy mode 21cm 28 cm
- Radiography mode 23cm 24 cm

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

LASER LOCALISER: Consisting of 2 laser modules, model ML635L - class 1M

- Class 1M
- Laser diode power < 5mW
- Optical output power 3.8 mW
- Wavelength 635 nm

- Laser light warning

CASSETTE HOLDER:

- Cassette dimensions 24 x 30 cm

STAND / MONITOR UNIT CONNECTION:

- Cable length 6m

2.2.2 IMAGING SYSTEM

9” I.I. tube version 12” I.I. tube version

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

- Model TH 9428 HP TH 9432 HP


- Image field: - nominal 9" / 6" / 4" 12" / 9" / 6"
- working 215 mm / 160 mm / 120 mm 290 mm / 215 mm / 160 mm
- "All metal" technology yes yes
- "Hi-Res" input screen yes yes
- Typical central resolution 64, 56, 48 lp/cm (4", 6", 9") 56, 50, 44 lp/cm (6", 9", 12")
- Contrast ratio 30:1, 25:1, 23:1 (4", 6", 9") 30:1, 25:1, 22:1 (6", 9", 12")
- DQE at 59.5 keV 65% (IEC standard) 65% (IEC standard)
- Conversion factor (typical) 240 Cd/m² / mR/s 240 Cd/m² / mR/s

GRID

- Diameter 235 mm 335 mm


- Interspace Al Al
- Ratio 8:1 8:1
- Line rate 103 lines/inch 103 lines/inch

TV MONITOR: 19" monochrome LCD 19" colour LCD

- Model IVL-GEV955IMI p/n FPM1152 IVL-GEV955IMI p/n FPM1165


- Resolution (pixels) 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024
- Contrast ratio 1000:1 (typ.) 800:1 (typ.)
- Brightness 1500 Cd/m2 800 Cd/m2
- Technology TFT monochrome TFT
- Viewing angle Vertical and horizontal 170 ° Vertical and horizontal 178 °
- Overall dimensions 432 x 467 x 251 mm 432 x 467 x 251 mm
- Max consumption 80W 80W

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.2.1 VERSIONS 1, 2 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

TV CAMERA: CCD100/CA

- C.C.D. sensor 1/2”, low persistence, interline


- Resolution (pixels) 752 x 582 pixels
- Video standard CCIR (625 lines, 50 Hz interlaced)
- Bandwidth 14 MHz
- Pixel clock /
- Scanning 4:3
- Signal : noise ration 40 dB at 0.12 lux
- Video signal amplitude Max 1 Vpp
- Rate 50Hz interlaced (25 i/s)

VIDEO MEMORY: SBFM

- Acquisition 576 x 576 x 10 bits


- D/A converter output 576 x 576 x 8 bits

- RAM LIH+110 images


LIH+4 images

- Real Time functions: - Edge enhancement


- Noise reduction with recursive filter + movement detection
- Horizontal image flip
- Digital rotation

- Printer output: 625 lines, 50 Hz, interlaced scanning

DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER: Medicap USB200 **

** optional

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.2.2 VERSIONS 3 , 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

TV CAMERA: CCD100/CA

- C.C.D. sensor 1/2”, low persistence, interline


- Resolution (pixels) 752 x 582 pixels
- Video standard CCIR (625 lines, 50 Hz interlaced)
- Bandwidth 14 MHz
- Pixel clock /
- Scanning 4:3
- Signal : noise ration 40 dB at 0.12 lux
- Video signal amplitude max 1 Vpp
- Rate 50Hz interlaced (25 i/s)

VIDEO PROCESSOR: DIP340 MR

- Acquisition 1024x512x12 bits


- D/A converter output 1280x1024x 8 bits

- Memory: HD up to 160GB (80000 images)


RAM 2GB

- Real Time functions: - Edge enhancement


- Noise reduction with recursive filter + movement detection
- Horizontal image flip
- Digital rotation
- Peak Opacification-Road Mapping **
- Subtraction (D.S.A.) **
- Automatic mask pickup **

- Post-Processing functions: - Cine-loop


- Contrast / Brightness control
- Edge enhancement
- Reverse polarity
- Patient data management
- Digital zoom
- Electronic shutters
- Subtraction (D.S.A.) **
- Landmarking **
- Pixel Shift **

- DICOM functions - Store SCU


- Print SCU
- Worklist SCU
- Query / Retrieve SCU
- CD/DVD recorder
- MPPS SCU
- Storage Commitment SCU

- Interface: - USB (for Windows printer)


- USB (for image saving)
- RJ45 (for DICOM 3 interface)

** optional

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.2.3 VERSIONS 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

TV CAMERA: CD1030ca

- C.C.D. sensor 2/3”, interline, progressive scanning


- Resolution (pixels) 1024 x 1024 pixels
- Video standard Serialised digital (proprietory)
- Bandwidth /
- Pixel clock 33MHz
- Scanning 1:1
- Signal : noise ration 60 dB at 0.12 lux
- Video signal amplitude /
- Rate 25Hz progressive (25 i/s)

VIDEO PROCESSOR: DIP340 HR

- Acquisition 1024x1024x12 bits


- D/A converter output 1280x1024x 8 bits

- Memory: HD up to 160GB (80000 images)


RAM 2GB

- Real Time functions: - Noise reduction with recursive filter + movement detection
- Horizontal image flip
- Digital rotation
- Peak Opacification-Road Mapping **
- Subtraction (D.S.A.) **
- Automatic mask pickup **
-LIH

- Post-Processing functions: - Cine-loop


- Contrast / Brightness control
- Edge enhancement
- Reverse polarity
- Patient data management
- Digital zoom
- Electronic shutters
- Subtraction (D.S.A.) **
- Landmarking **
- Pixel Shift **
- Measurements

- DICOM functions - Store SCU


- Print SCU
- Worklist SCU
- Query / Retrieve SCU
- CD/DVD recorder
- MPPS SCU
- Storage Commitment SCU

- Interface: - USB (for Windows printer)


- USB (for image saving)
- RJ45 (for DICOM 3 interface)

** optional

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.3 EXPOSURE MODES

2.2.3.1 VERSIONS 1, 3 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Small focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA high mA (boosted)

- mA 0.1 - 2.5 mA 0.2 – 5 mA 0.32 – 8 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.1 mA 40 kV / 0.2 mA 40 kV / 0.3 mA


50 kV / 0.3 mA 50 kV / 0.6 mA 50 kV / 1.0 mA
70 kV / 2.5 mA 70 kV / 5.0 mA 70 kV / 8.0 mA
90 kV / 2.0 mA 90 kV / 4.2 mA 90 kV / 6.6 mA
120 kV / 1.5 mA 120 kV / 3.1 mA 120 kV / 5.0 mA

- Nominal working dose 35 µR/s 35 µR/s 70 µR/s


(306 nGy/s) (306 nGy/s) (612 nGy/s)

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray emission / Acquisition 1 image every: 0.5 sec/ 1 sec / 3 sec

- X-ray pulse time 300 ms

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA

- mA 0.1 – 2.5 mA 0.2 - 5 mA

- kV/mA correlation See continuous fluoroscopy See continuous fluoroscopy

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

- Nominal working dose


- 1 image every 0.5 s 21 µR/s (183 nGy/s)
- 1 image every 1 s 10.5 µR/s (91 nGy/s)
- 1 image every 3 s 3.5 µR/s (30 nGy/s)

ONE SHOT FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)

- Focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- mA 0.4 - 10 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.4 mA


50 kV / 1.2 mA
70 kV / 10.0 mA
90 kV / 8.3 mA
120 kV / 6.2 mA

- X-ray pulse time 1300 ms

- Automatic image saving yes

- Nominal working dose 80 µR (700 nGy)

RADIOGRAPHY:

- Focus 1.5 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- Standard radiography mA 23.3 - 65 mA

- High Power radiography mA 33.3 - 100 mA

- mAs 1 - 250 mAs

- Utilisation factor 1 : 14

- Max mAs 40 - 50 kV: max 250 mAs


51 - 65 kV: max 200 mAs
66 - 80 kV: max 160 mAs
81 - 100 kV: max 130 mAs
101 - 120 kV: max 100 mAs

- Power (isoWatt) 2800W in Standard radiography


4000W in High Power radiography

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.3.2 VERSIONS 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Small focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA high mA (boosted)

- mA 0.1 - 2.5 mA 0.2 – 5 mA 0.4 – 10 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.1 mA 40 kV / 0.2 mA 40 kV / 0.4 mA


50 kV / 0.3 mA 50 kV / 0.6 mA 50 kV / 1.2 mA
70 kV / 2.5 mA 70 kV / 5.0 mA 70 kV / 10.0 mA
90 kV / 2.0 mA 90 kV / 4.2 mA 90 kV / 8.3 mA
120 kV / 1.5 mA 120 kV / 3.1 mA 120 kV / 7.5 mA

- Nominal working dose 35 µR/s 35 µR/s 70 µR/s


(306 nGy/s) (306 nGy/s) (612 nGy/s)

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray emission / Acquisition 1 image every: 0.5 sec/ 1 sec / 3 sec

- X-ray pulse time 300 ms

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA

- mA 0.1 – 2.5 mA 0.2 - 5 mA

- - kV/mA correlation See continuous fluoroscopy See continuous fluoroscopy

- Nominal working dose


- 1 image every 0.5 s 21 µR/s (183 nGy/s)
- 1 image every 1 s 10.5 µR/s (91 nGy/s)
- 1 image every 3 s 3.5 µR/s (30 nGy/s)

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

ONE SHOT FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)

- Focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- mA 0.48 - 12 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.5 mA


50 kV / 1.4 mA
70 kV / 12.0 mA
90 kV / 10.0 mA
120 kV / 7.5 mA

- X-ray pulse time 1300 ms

- Automatic image saving yes

- Nominal working dose 80 µR (700 nGy)

RADIOGRAPHY:

- Focus 0.6 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- Standard radiography mA 23.3 - 65 mA

- High Power radiography mA 33.3 - 100 mA

- mAs
1 - 250 mAs
- Utilisation factor
1 : 14
- Max mAs
40 - 50 kV: max 250 mAs
51 - 65 kV: max 200 mAs
66 - 80 kV: max 160 mAs
81 - 100 kV: max 130 mAs
101 - 120 kV: max 100 mAs
- Power (isoWatt)
2800W in Standard radiography
4000W in High Power radiography

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.3.3 VERSION 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Small focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA high mA (boosted)

- mA 0.1 - 2.5 mA 0.2 – 5 mA 0.32 – 8 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.1 mA 40 kV / 0.2 mA 40 kV / 0.3 mA


50 kV / 0.3 mA 50 kV / 0.6 mA 50 kV / 1.0 mA
70 kV / 2.5 mA 70 kV / 5.0 mA 70 kV / 8.0 mA
90 kV / 2.0 mA 90 kV / 4.2 mA 90 kV / 6.6 mA
120 kV / 1.5 mA 120 kV / 3.1 mA 120 kV / 5.0 mA

- Nominal working dose 17 µR/s 35 µR/s 70 µR/s


(153 nGy/s) (306 nGy/s) (612 nGy/s)

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray emission / Acquisition 1 image every: 0.5 sec/ 1 sec / 3 sec

- X-ray pulse time 300 ms

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA

- mA
0.1 – 2,5 mA 0,2 - 5 mA
- kV/mA correlation
See continuous fluoroscopy See continuous fluoroscopy
- Nominal working dose
- 1 image every 0.5 s
- 1 image every 1 s 10,5 µR/s (91 nGy/s) 21 µR/s (183 nGy/s)
- 1 image every 3 s 5,2 µR/s (46 nGy/s) 10,5 µR/s (91 nGy/s)
1,7 µR/s (15 nGy/s) 3,5 µR/s (30 nGy/s)

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

ONE SHOT FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)

- Focus 0.5 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- mA 0.4 - 10 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.4 mA


50 kV / 1.2 mA
70 kV / 10.0 mA
90 kV / 8.3 mA
120 kV / 6.2 mA

- X-ray pulse time 1300 ms

- Automatic image saving yes

- Nominal working dose 80 µR (700 nGy)

RADIOGRAPHY:

- Focus 1.5 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- Standard radiography mA 23.3 - 65 mA

- High Power radiography mA 33.3 - 100 mA

- mAs 1 - 250 mAs

- Utilisation factor 1 : 14

- Max mAs 40 - 50 kV: max 250 mAs


51 - 65 kV: max 200 mAs
66 - 80 kV: max 160 mAs
81 - 100 kV: max 130 mAs
101 - 120 kV: max 100 mAs

- Power (isoWatt) 2800W in Standard radiography


4000W in High Power radiography

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.3.4 VERSION 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Small focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 – 120 kV

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA high mA (boosted)

- mA 0.1 - 2.5 mA 0.2 – 5 mA 0.4 – 10 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.1 mA 40 kV / 0.2 mA 40 kV / 0.4 mA


50 kV / 0.3 mA 50 kV / 0.6 mA 50 kV / 1.2 mA
70 kV / 2.5 mA 70 kV / 5.0 mA 70 kV / 10.0 mA
90 kV / 2.0 mA 90 kV / 4.2 mA 90 kV / 8.3 mA
120 kV / 1.5 mA 120 kV / 3.1 mA 120 kV / 7.5 mA

- Nominal working dose 17 µR/s 35 µR/s 70 µR/s


(153 nGy/s) (306 nGy/s) (612 nGy/s)

PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)
- 5’ alarm timer yes
- 10’ max exposure time safety device yes

- Focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- X-ray emission / Acquisition 1 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 25 images / sec

- mA 1.6 - 40 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 1.6 mA


50 kV / 4.8 mA
70 kV / 40.0 mA
90 kV / 33.2 mA
120 kV / 25.0 mA

- X-ray modes low mA normal mA

- X-ray pulse time 10 ms 20 ms

- Nominal working dose 2 µR/frame 4 µR/frame


(17.4 nGy/frame) (35 nGy/frame)

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

ONE SHOT FLUOROSCOPY:

- Automatic dose control yes


(kV-mA)

- Focus 0.3 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- mA 0.48 - 12 mA

- kV/mA correlation 40 kV / 0.5 mA


50 kV / 1.4 mA
70 kV / 12.0 mA
90 kV / 10.0 mA
120 kV / 7.5 mA

- X-ray flash time 1300 ms

- Automatic image saving yes

- Nominal working dose 80 µR (700 nGy)

RADIOGRAPHY:

- Focus 0.6 mm

- kVp 40 - 120 kV

- Standard radiography mA 23.3 - 65 mA

- High Power radiography mA 33.3 - 100 mA

- mAs 1 - 250 mAs

- Utilisation factor 1 : 14

- Max mAs 40 - 50 kV: max 250 mAs


51 - 65 kV: max 200 mAs
66 - 80 kV: max 160 mAs
81 - 100 kV: max 130 mAs
101 - 120 kV: max 100 mAs

- Power (isoWatt) 2800W in Standard radiography


4000W in High Power radiography

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.4 mAs TABLE

R’ 10
mAs values
1.00 10.0 100
1.25 12.5 125
1.60 16.0 160
2.00 20.0 200
2.50 25.0 250
3.20 32.0
4.00 40.0
5.00 50.0
6.30 63.0
8.00 80.0

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.5 kV/mA CORRELATION

2.2.5.1 VERSIONS 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

mA fluoroscopy mA radiography
High Power Standard Max mAs
kV high mA one shot
low mA normal mA radiography radiography radiography
(boosted)
(max 5 mAs) > 5 mAs
40 0.10 0.20 0.32 0.40 100.00 65.00 250.00
41 0.12 0.24 0.38 0.48 97.56 65.00 250.00
42 0.14 0.28 0.45 0.56 95.23 65.00 250.00
43 0.16 0.32 0.51 0.64 93.02 65.00 250.00
44 0.18 0.36 0.58 0.72 90.90 63.63 250.00
45 0.20 0.40 0.64 0.80 88.88 62.22 250.00
46 0.22 0.44 0.70 0.88 86.95 60.86 250.00
47 0.24 0.48 0.77 0.96 85.10 59.57 250.00
48 0.26 0.52 0.83 1.04 83.33 58.33 250.00
49 0.28 0.56 0.90 1.12 81.63 57.14 250.00
50 0.30 0.60 0.96 1.20 80.00 56.00 250.00
51 0.40 0.80 1.28 1.60 78.43 54.90 200.00
52 0.50 1.00 1.60 2.00 76.92 53.84 200.00
53 0.60 1.20 1.92 2.40 75.47 52.83 200.00
54 0.70 1.40 2.24 2.80 74.07 51.85 200.00
55 0.80 1.60 2.56 3.20 72.72 50.90 200.00
56 0.92 1.84 2.94 3.68 71.42 50.00 200.00
57 1.04 2.08 3.33 4.16 70.17 49.12 200.00
58 1.16 2.32 3.71 4.64 68.96 48.27 200.00
59 1.28 2.56 4.10 5.12 67.79 47.45 200.00
60 1.40 2.80 4.48 5.60 66.66 46.66 200.00
61 1.52 3.04 4.86 6.08 65.57 45.90 200.00
62 1.64 3.28 5.25 6.56 64.51 45.16 200.00
63 1.76 3.52 5.63 7.04 63.49 44.44 200.00
64 1.88 3.76 6.02 7.52 62.50 43.75 200.00
65 2.00 4.00 6.40 8.00 61.53 43.07 200.00
66 2.10 4.20 6.72 8.40 60.60 42.42 160.00
67 2.20 4.40 7.04 8.80 59.70 41.79 160.00
68 2.30 4.60 7.36 9.20 58.82 41.17 160.00
69 2.40 4.80 7.68 9.60 57.97 40.57 160.00
70 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 57.14 40.00 160.00
71 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 56.33 39.43 160.00
72 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 55.55 38.88 160.00
73 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 54.79 38.35 160.00
74 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 54.05 37.83 160.00
75 2.50 5.00 8.00 10.00 53.33 37.33 160.00
76 2.47 4.94 7.90 9.88 52.63 36.84 160.00
77 2.44 4.87 7.79 9.74 51.94 36.36 160.00
78 2.41 4.81 7.70 9.62 51.28 35.89 160.00
79 2.37 4.74 7.58 9.48 50.63 35.44 160.00
80 2.34 4.68 7.49 9.36 50.00 35.00 160.00
81 2.32 4.63 7.41 9.26 49.38 34.56 125.00
82 2.29 4.57 7.31 9.14 48.78 34.14 125.00
83 2.26 4.52 7.23 9.04 48.19 33.73 125.00
84 2.23 4.45 7.12 8.90 47.61 33.33 125.00
85 2.20 4.40 7.04 8.80 47.05 32.94 125.00
86 2.18 4.35 6.96 8.70 46.51 32.55 125.00
87 2.15 4.30 6.88 8.60 45.97 32.18 125.00
88 2.13 4.26 6.82 8.52 45.45 31.81 125.00
89 2.11 4.21 6.74 8.42 44.94 31.46 125.00
90 2.08 4.16 6.66 8.32 44.44 31.11 125.00
91 2.06 4.12 6.59 8.24 43.95 30.76 125.00
92 2.04 4.08 6.53 8.16 43.47 30.43 125.00
93 2.02 4.04 6.46 8.08 43.01 30.10 125.00
94 2.00 3.99 6.38 7.98 42.55 29.78 125.00
95 1.97 3.94 6.30 7.88 42.10 29.47 125.00
96 1.95 3.90 6.24 7.80 41.66 29.16 125.00
97 1.93 3.86 6.18 7.72 41.23 28.86 125.00
98 1.91 3.82 6.11 7.64 40.81 28.57 125.00
99 1.89 3.78 6.05 7.56 40.40 28.28 125.00
100 1.88 3.75 6.00 7.50 40.00 28.00 125.00
101 1.86 3.72 5.95 7.44 39.60 27.72 100.00
102 1.84 3.68 5.89 7.36 39.21 27.45 100.00
103 1.82 3.64 5.82 7.28 38.83 27.18 100.00
104 1.81 3.61 5.78 7.22 38.46 26.92 100.00
105 1.79 3.57 5.71 7.14 38.09 26.66 100.00
106 1.77 3.53 5.65 7.06 37.73 26.41 100.00
107 1.75 3.50 5.60 7.00 37.38 26.16 100.00
108 1.73 3.46 5.54 6.92 37.03 25.92 100.00
109 1.72 3.43 5.49 6.86 36.69 25.68 100.00
110 1.70 3.40 5.44 6.80 36.36 25.45 100.00
111 1.69 3.37 5.39 6.74 36.03 25.22 100.00
112 1.68 3.35 5.36 6.70 35.71 25.00 100.00
113 1.67 3.33 5.33 6.66 35.39 24.78 100.00
114 1.65 3.29 5.26 6.58 35.08 24.56 100.00
115 1.63 3.26 5.22 6.52 34.78 24.35 100.00
116 1.62 3.23 5.17 6.46 34.48 24.14 100.00
117 1.60 3.20 5.12 6.40 34.18 23.93 100.00
118 1.59 3.18 5.09 6.36 33.89 23.73 100.00
119 1.58 3.15 5.04 6.30 33.61 23.53 100.00
120 1.56 3.12 4.99 6.24 33.33 23.33 100.00

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

FLUOROSCOPY

15,00

10,00

5,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

mA ridotti 0,10 0,20 0,30 0,80 1,40 2,00 2,50 2,50 2,34 2,20 2,08 1,97 1,88 1,79 1,70 1,63 1,56
mA normali 0,20 0,40 0,60 1,60 2,80 4,00 5,00 5,00 4,68 4,40 4,16 3,94 3,75 3,57 3,40 3,26 3,12
alti mA (boosted) 0,32 0,64 0,96 2,56 4,48 6,40 8,00 8,00 7,49 7,04 6,66 6,30 6,00 5,71 5,44 5,22 4,99
one shot 0,40 0,80 1,20 3,20 5,60 8,00 10,0 10,0 9,36 8,80 8,32 7,88 7,50 7,14 6,80 6,52 6,24
kV

RADIOGRAPHY

150,00

100,00

50,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Standard 65,0 62,2 56,0 50,9 46,6 43,0 40,0 37,3 35,0 32,9 31,1 29,4 28,0 26,6 25,4 24,3 23,3
High pow er 100, 88,8 80,0 72,7 66,6 61,5 57,1 53,3 50,0 47,0 44,4 42,1 40,0 38,0 36,3 34,7 33,3
kV

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.5.2 VERSIONS 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

mA fluoroscopy mA radiography
High Power Standard Max mAs
kV high mA one shot
low mA normal mA radiography radiography radiography
(boosted)
(max 5 mAs) > 5 mAs
40 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.48 100.00 65.00 250.00
41 0.12 0.24 0.48 0.58 97.56 65.00 250.00
42 0.14 0.28 0.56 0.67 95.23 65.00 250.00
43 0.16 0.32 0.64 0.77 93.02 65.00 250.00
44 0.18 0.36 0.72 0.86 90.90 63.63 250.00
45 0.20 0.40 0.80 0.96 88.88 62.22 250.00
46 0.22 0.44 0.88 1.06 86.95 60.86 250.00
47 0.24 0.48 0.96 1.15 85.10 59.57 250.00
48 0.26 0.52 1.04 1.25 83.33 58.33 250.00
49 0.28 0.56 1.12 1.34 81.63 57.14 250.00
50 0.30 0.60 1.20 1.44 80.00 56.00 250.00
51 0.40 0.80 1.60 1.92 78.43 54.90 200.00
52 0.50 1.00 2.00 2.40 76.92 53.84 200.00
53 0.60 1.20 2.40 2.88 75.47 52.83 200.00
54 0.70 1.40 2.80 3.36 74.07 51.85 200.00
55 0.80 1.60 3.20 3.84 72.72 50.90 200.00
56 0.92 1.84 3.68 4.42 71.42 50.00 200.00
57 1.04 2.08 4.16 4.99 70.17 49.12 200.00
58 1.16 2.32 4.64 5.57 68.96 48.27 200.00
59 1.28 2.56 5.12 6.14 67.79 47.45 200.00
60 1.40 2.80 5.60 6.72 66.66 46.66 200.00
61 1.52 3.04 6.08 7.30 65.57 45.90 200.00
62 1.64 3.28 6.56 7.87 64.51 45.16 200.00
63 1.76 3.52 7.04 8.45 63.49 44.44 200.00
64 1.88 3.76 7.52 9.02 62.50 43.75 200.00
65 2.00 4.00 8.00 9.60 61.53 43.07 200.00
66 2.10 4.20 8.40 10.08 60.60 42.42 160.00
67 2.20 4.40 8.80 10.56 59.70 41.79 160.00
68 2.30 4.60 9.20 11.04 58.82 41.17 160.00
69 2.40 4.80 9.60 11.52 57.97 40.57 160.00
70 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 57.14 40.00 160.00
71 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 56.33 39.43 160.00
72 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 55.55 38.88 160.00
73 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 54.79 38.35 160.00
74 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 54.05 37.83 160.00
75 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 53.33 37.33 160.00
76 2.47 4.94 9.88 11.86 52.63 36.84 160.00
77 2.44 4.87 9.74 11.69 51.94 36.36 160.00
78 2.41 4.81 9.62 11.54 51.28 35.89 160.00
79 2.37 4.74 9.48 11.38 50.63 35.44 160.00
80 2.34 4.68 9.36 11.23 50.00 35.00 160.00
81 2.32 4.63 9.26 11.11 49.38 34.56 125.00
82 2.29 4.57 9.14 10.97 48.78 34.14 125.00
83 2.26 4.52 9.04 10.85 48.19 33.73 125.00
84 2.23 4.45 8.90 10.68 47.61 33.33 125.00
85 2.20 4.40 8.80 10.56 47.05 32.94 125.00
86 2.18 4.35 8.70 10.44 46.51 32.55 125.00
87 2.15 4.30 8.60 10.32 45.97 32.18 125.00
88 2.13 4.26 8.52 10.22 45.45 31.81 125.00
89 2.11 4.21 8.42 10.10 44.94 31.46 125.00
90 2.08 4.16 8.32 9.98 44.44 31.11 125.00
91 2.06 4.12 8.24 9.89 43.95 30.76 125.00
92 2.04 4.08 8.16 9.79 43.47 30.43 125.00
93 2.02 4.04 8.08 9.70 43.01 30.10 125.00
94 2.00 3.99 7.98 9.58 42.55 29.78 125.00
95 1.97 3.94 7.88 9.46 42.10 29.47 125.00
96 1.95 3.90 7.80 9.36 41.66 29.16 125.00
97 1.93 3.86 7.72 9.26 41.23 28.86 125.00
98 1.91 3.82 7.64 9.17 40.81 28.57 125.00
99 1.89 3.78 7.56 9.07 40.40 28.28 125.00
100 1.88 3.75 7.50 9.00 40.00 28.00 125.00
101 1.86 3.72 7.44 8.93 39.60 27.72 100.00
102 1.84 3.68 7.36 8.83 39.21 27.45 100.00
103 1.82 3.64 7.28 8.74 38.83 27.18 100.00
104 1.81 3.61 7.22 8.66 38.46 26.92 100.00
105 1.79 3.57 7.14 8.57 38.09 26.66 100.00
106 1.77 3.53 7.06 8.47 37.73 26.41 100.00
107 1.75 3.50 7.00 8.40 37.38 26.16 100.00
108 1.73 3.46 6.92 8.30 37.03 25.92 100.00
109 1.72 3.43 6.86 8.23 36.69 25.68 100.00
110 1.70 3.40 6.80 8.16 36.36 25.45 100.00
111 1.69 3.37 6.74 8.09 36.03 25.22 100.00
112 1.68 3.35 6.70 8.04 35.71 25.00 100.00
113 1.67 3.33 6.66 7.99 35.39 24.78 100.00
114 1.65 3.29 6.58 7.90 35.08 24.56 100.00
115 1.63 3.26 6.52 7.82 34.78 24.35 100.00
116 1.62 3.23 6.46 7.75 34.48 24.14 100.00
117 1.60 3.20 6.40 7.68 34.18 23.93 100.00
118 1.59 3.18 6.36 7.63 33.89 23.73 100.00
119 1.58 3.15 6.30 7.56 33.61 23.53 100.00
120 1.56 3.12 6.24 7.49 33.33 23.33 100.00

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

FLUOROSCOPY

15,00

10,00

5,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

mA ridotti 0,10 0,20 0,30 0,80 1,40 2,00 2,50 2,50 2,34 2,21 2,08 1,97 1,88 1,79 1,70 1,63 1,56
mA normali 0,20 0,40 0,60 1,60 2,80 4,00 5,00 5,00 4,68 4,41 4,16 3,94 3,75 3,57 3,40 3,26 3,12
alti mA (boosted) 0,40 0,80 1,20 3,20 5,60 8,00 10,0 10,0 9,36 8,82 8,32 7,88 7,50 7,14 6,80 6,52 6,24
one shot 0,48 0,96 1,44 3,84 6,72 9,60 12,0 12,0 11,2 10,5 9,98 9,46 9,00 8,57 8,16 7,82 7,49
kV

RADIOGRAPHY

150,00

100,00

50,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Standard 65 62,2 56 50,9 46,7 43,1 40 37,3 35 32,9 31,1 29,5 28 26,7 25,5 24,4 23,3
High pow er 100 88,9 80 72,7 66,7 61,5 57,1 53,3 50 47,1 44,4 42,1 40 38,1 36,4 34,8 33,3
kV

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.5.3 VERSION 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

mA fluoroscopy mA radiography
High Power Standard Max mAs
kV high mA one shot Pulsed HCF
low mA normal mA radiography radiography radiography
(boosted) fluoroscopy
(max 5 mAs) > 5 mAs
40 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.48 1.60 100.00 65.00 250.00
41 0.12 0.24 0.48 0.58 1.92 97.56 65.00 250.00
42 0.14 0.28 0.56 0.67 2.24 95.23 65.00 250.00
43 0.16 0.32 0.64 0.77 2.56 93.02 65.00 250.00
44 0.18 0.36 0.72 0.86 2.88 90.90 63.63 250.00
45 0.20 0.40 0.80 0.96 3.20 88.88 62.22 250.00
46 0.22 0.44 0.88 1.06 3.52 86.95 60.86 250.00
47 0.24 0.48 0.96 1.15 3.84 85.10 59.57 250.00
48 0.26 0.52 1.04 1.25 4.16 83.33 58.33 250.00
49 0.28 0.56 1.12 1.34 4.48 81.63 57.14 250.00
50 0.30 0.60 1.20 1.44 4.80 80.00 56.00 250.00
51 0.40 0.80 1.60 1.92 6.40 78.43 54.90 200.00
52 0.50 1.00 2.00 2.40 8.00 76.92 53.84 200.00
53 0.60 1.20 2.40 2.88 9.60 75.47 52.83 200.00
54 0.70 1.40 2.80 3.36 11.20 74.07 51.85 200.00
55 0.80 1.60 3.20 3.84 12.80 72.72 50.90 200.00
56 0.92 1.84 3.68 4.42 14.72 71.42 50.00 200.00
57 1.04 2.08 4.16 4.99 16.64 70.17 49.12 200.00
58 1.16 2.32 4.64 5.57 18.56 68.96 48.27 200.00
59 1.28 2.56 5.12 6.14 20.48 67.79 47.45 200.00
60 1.40 2.80 5.60 6.72 22.40 66.66 46.66 200.00
61 1.52 3.04 6.08 7.30 24.32 65.57 45.90 200.00
62 1.64 3.28 6.56 7.87 26.24 64.51 45.16 200.00
63 1.76 3.52 7.04 8.45 28.16 63.49 44.44 200.00
64 1.88 3.76 7.52 9.02 30.08 62.50 43.75 200.00
65 2.00 4.00 8.00 9.60 32.00 61.53 43.07 200.00
66 2.10 4.20 8.40 10.08 33.60 60.60 42.42 160.00
67 2.20 4.40 8.80 10.56 35.20 59.70 41.79 160.00
68 2.30 4.60 9.20 11.04 36.80 58.82 41.17 160.00
69 2.40 4.80 9.60 11.52 38.40 57.97 40.57 160.00
70 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 57.14 40.00 160.00
71 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 56.33 39.43 160.00
72 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 55.55 38.88 160.00
73 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 54.79 38.35 160.00
74 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 54.05 37.83 160.00
75 2.50 5.00 10.00 12.00 40.00 53.33 37.33 160.00
76 2.47 4.94 9.88 11.86 39.52 52.63 36.84 160.00
77 2.44 4.87 9.74 11.69 38.96 51.94 36.36 160.00
78 2.41 4.81 9.62 11.54 38.48 51.28 35.89 160.00
79 2.37 4.74 9.48 11.38 37.92 50.63 35.44 160.00
80 2.34 4.68 9.36 11.23 37.44 50.00 35.00 160.00
81 2.32 4.63 9.26 11.11 37.04 49.38 34.56 125.00
82 2.29 4.57 9.14 10.97 36.56 48.78 34.14 125.00
83 2.26 4.52 9.04 10.85 36.16 48.19 33.73 125.00
84 2.23 4.45 8.90 10.68 35.60 47.61 33.33 125.00
85 2.20 4.40 8.80 10.56 35.20 47.05 32.94 125.00
86 2.18 4.35 8.70 10.44 34.80 46.51 32.55 125.00
87 2.15 4.30 8.60 10.32 34.40 45.97 32.18 125.00
88 2.13 4.26 8.52 10.22 34.08 45.45 31.81 125.00
89 2.11 4.21 8.42 10.10 33.68 44.94 31.46 125.00
90 2.08 4.16 8.32 9.98 33.28 44.44 31.11 125.00
91 2.06 4.12 8.24 9.89 32.96 43.95 30.76 125.00
92 2.04 4.08 8.16 9.79 32.64 43.47 30.43 125.00
93 2.02 4.04 8.08 9.70 32.32 43.01 30.10 125.00
94 2.00 3.99 7.98 9.58 31.92 42.55 29.78 125.00
95 1.97 3.94 7.88 9.46 31.52 42.10 29.47 125.00
96 1.95 3.90 7.80 9.36 31.20 41.66 29.16 125.00
97 1.93 3.86 7.72 9.26 30.88 41.23 28.86 125.00
98 1.91 3.82 7.64 9.17 30.56 40.81 28.57 125.00
99 1.89 3.78 7.56 9.07 30.24 40.40 28.28 125.00
100 1.88 3.75 7.50 9.00 30.00 40.00 28.00 125.00
101 1.86 3.72 7.44 8.93 29.76 39.60 27.72 100.00
102 1.84 3.68 7.36 8.83 29.44 39.21 27.45 100.00
103 1.82 3.64 7.28 8.74 29.12 38.83 27.18 100.00
104 1.81 3.61 7.22 8.66 28.88 38.46 26.92 100.00
105 1.79 3.57 7.14 8.57 28.56 38.09 26.66 100.00
106 1.77 3.53 7.06 8.47 28.24 37.73 26.41 100.00
107 1.75 3.50 7.00 8.40 28.00 37.38 26.16 100.00
108 1.73 3.46 6.92 8.30 27.68 37.03 25.92 100.00
109 1.72 3.43 6.86 8.23 27.44 36.69 25.68 100.00
110 1.70 3.40 6.80 8.16 27.20 36.36 25.45 100.00
111 1.69 3.37 6.74 8.09 26.96 36.03 25.22 100.00
112 1.68 3.35 6.70 8.04 26.80 35.71 25.00 100.00
113 1.67 3.33 6.66 7.99 26.64 35.39 24.78 100.00
114 1.65 3.29 6.58 7.90 26.32 35.08 24.56 100.00
115 1.63 3.26 6.52 7.82 26.08 34.78 24.35 100.00
116 1.62 3.23 6.46 7.75 25.84 34.48 24.14 100.00
117 1.60 3.20 6.40 7.68 25.60 34.18 23.93 100.00
118 1.59 3.18 6.36 7.63 25.44 33.89 23.73 100.00
119 1.58 3.15 6.30 7.56 25.20 33.61 23.53 100.00
120 1.56 3.12 6.24 7.49 24.96 33.33 23.33 100.00

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

FLUOROSCOPY

15,00

10,00
mA

5,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

mA ridotti 0,10 0,20 0,30 0,80 1,40 2,00 2,50 2,50 2,34 2,21 2,08 1,97 1,88 1,79 1,70 1,63 1,56
mA normali 0,20 0,40 0,60 1,60 2,80 4,00 5,00 5,00 4,68 4,41 4,16 3,94 3,75 3,57 3,40 3,26 3,12
alti mA (boosted) 0,40 0,80 1,20 3,20 5,60 8,00 10,0 10,0 9,36 8,82 8,32 7,88 7,50 7,14 6,80 6,52 6,24
one shot 0,48 0,96 1,44 3,84 6,72 9,60 12,0 12,0 11,2 10,5 9,98 9,46 9,00 8,57 8,16 7,82 7,49
kV

RADIOGRAPHY

150

100
mA

50

0
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Standard 65 62,2 56 50,9 46,7 43,1 40 37,3 35 32,9 31,1 29,5 28 26,7 25,5 24,4 23,3
High pow er 100 88,9 80 72,7 66,7 61,5 57,1 53,3 50 47,1 44,4 42,1 40 38,1 36,4 34,8 33,3
kV

HCF PULSED FLUOROSCOPY

50,00

40,00

30,00

20,00

10,00

0,00
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

mA ridotti / mA normali 1,60 3,20 4,80 12,8 22,4 32,0 40,0 40,0 37,4 35,2 33,2 31,5 30,0 28,5 27,2 26,0 24,9
kV

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.6 DOSE METERING

2.2.6.1 INDICATIONS

Unit of measurement Tools

DOSE PER AREA µGy * m2 See para. 1.2.7.1

REFERENCE AIR KERMA mGy Calculated at the REFERENCE INPUT POINT


FOR THE PATIENT some 30cm from the I.I.
REFERENCE AIR KERMA
mGy /minute tube.
RATE

2.2.6.2 REFERENCE AIR KERMA RATE


VERSIONS 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)
low mA normal mA high mA (boosted) one shot
kV Kerma Rate Kerma rate Kerma Rate Kerma Rate
mA mA mA mA
(mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min)
Min Kerma
Rate 40 0.10 0.0867 0.20 0.17 0.32 0.27 0.40 0.34
70 2.50 11.9 5.00 23.8 8.00 38.08 10.00 47.6
Max Kerma
Rate
120 1.56 21.1 3.12 42.3 4.99 67.68 6.24 84.6

2.2.6.3 REFERENCE AIR KERMA RATE


VERSIONS 2, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

low mA normal mA high mA (boosted) one shot


kV Kerma Rate Kerma rate Kerma Rate Kerma Rate
mA mA mA mA
(mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min)
Min Kerma
Rate 40 0.10 0.149 0.20 0.298 0.40 0.596 0.48 0.596
70 2.50 16.86 5.00 37.72 10.00 75.44 12.00 75.44
Max Kerma
Rate 120 1.56 28.52 3.12 57 6.24 114 7.49 114

2.2.6.4 REFERENCE AIR KERMA RATE


VERSION 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

Pulsed HCF
low mA normal mA high mA (boosted) one shot
fluoroscopy
kV Kerma Rate
Kerma Rate Kerma Rate Kerma Rate Kerma Rate
mA mA mA mA mA (mGy /min)
(mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min) (mGy /min)
at 12i/s
Min Kerma
Rate 40 0.10 0.149 0.20 0.298 0.40 0.596 0.48 0.71 1.60
70 2.50 16.86 5.00 37.72 10.00 75.44 12.00 90.5 40.00
Max Kerma
Rate 120 1.56 28.52 3.12 57 6.24 114 7.49 136.8 24.96

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.2.7 OPTIONAL MODULES

2.2.7.1 DOSE AREA METER

Model KermaX plus (mod. 120-122)

Power DC: 12 - 29 V (max 50 mA)

Useful Diameter 72 mm

Sensitivity 1 mGy cm2

2.2.7.2 LASER LOCALISER

Diode laser Class 2M

Power 3.8 mW

Wavelength 635nm

2.2.7.3 MEDICAP USB200 (VIDEO MEMORY VERSIONS ONLY)

Model Medicap USB200

Power 100-240V 50-60Hz 20W

Dimensions 240 x 200 x 63 mm

Weight 1.7 kg
USB flash drive / external USB
Supports
fixed drive
Image formats JPEG, TIFF, PNG, DICOM

Video formats MPEG2 PS, DVD quality

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.3 FUSES

The equipment is fitted with a magnetothermal switch to protect the power circuit on the monitor unit.
If this trips, reset it.
If the magnetothermal switch trips again immediately after resetting, the system is malfunctioning: call
Technical Service.

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.24


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.4 OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

2.4.1 OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR UNIT

2.4.1.1 SBFM VIDEO MEMORY VERSION

Weight: 115 kg (monitor unit without monitors)


Weight of 1 colour monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1165 : 6.1 kg
Weight of 1 monochrome monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1152: 5.4 kg

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.25


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.4.1.2 VIDEO MEMORY VERSION WITH MEDICAP USB 200 OPTION

Weight: 118 kg (monitor unit without monitors)


Weight of 1 colour monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1165 : 6.1 kg
Weight of 1 monochrome monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1152: 5.4 kg

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.26


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.4.1.3 DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR VERSION

Weight: 125 kg (monitor unit without monitors)


Weight of 1 colour monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1165: 6.1 kg
Weight of 1 monochrome monitor, IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1152: 5.4 kg

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.27


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNUCAL MANUAL

2.4.1.4 MONITOR ROTATION

This figure is valid for all versions:

Clockwise 180° Normal position Antiorario 109°

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.28


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.4.2 OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT OF THE STAND

2.4.2.1 VERSION WITH 9” I.I. TUBE + FIXED ANODE MONOBLOCK

ATS
ARCO 14 0F
SERIAL : XX XXX 66 XX

V ia A . V ol ta ,10
2 4060 T or re de ' R over i ( BG ) ,I TAL Y

Weight: 244 kg 9” fixed anode stand

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.29


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.4.2.2 VERSION WITH 9” I.I. TUBE + ROTATING ANODE MONOBLOCK

ATS
ARCO 140R
SER IAL: XX XXX 66 X X
V ia A. Vol ta ,10
240 60 Tor re de' R ov er i (B G) ,I TA LY

Weight: 250 kg 9” rotating anode stand

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.30


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.4.2.3 VERSION WITH 12” I.I. TUBE + ROTATING ANODE MONOBLOCK

ATS
ARCO 140R
S ERIAL : X X XXX6 6 XX
Vi a A . V ol ta ,10
2 406 0 To rre de ' R ov eri (BG), ITA LY

Weight: 265 kg 12” rotating anode stand

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.31


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.5 FOCAL SPOT POSITION

2.5.1 9” FIXED ANODE

Valid for versions 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

Fixed beam limitation

Reference axis

Focal spot (red dot)

Anode angle

2.5.2 9” ROTATING ANODE

Valid for versions 2, 4, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

Fixed beam limitation

Reference axis

Focal spot (red dot)

Anode angle

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.32


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.5.3 12” ROTATING ANODE

Valid for versions 2, 4, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

Fixed beam limitation

Reference axis

Focal spot (red dot)


Anode angle

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.33


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.6 DISPERSED RADIATION IN SIGNIFICANT ZONE OF OCCUPANCY

2.6.1 VERSIONS 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

- Measurement condition in accordance with EN 60601-2-54


- Exposure condition : 120 KV/3,1 mA
- Measuring instrument: INOVISION 35050

revision 0 PART 1 page 2.34


code 66 80 011 - Mti S1 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

3.1 PACKAGING

The system sits on a pallet and is then covered with a cardboard box, anchored to the pallet by straps
and screws.

A ramp needed to remove the stand and the monitor unit from the pallet is also enclosed.

Follow the unpacking instructions in reverse order should the system need to be repacked n the future
(para. 1.2 of Part 2 of this manual).

3.2 STORAGE

The environmental conditions indicated in the table below should be guaranteed for both storage and
handling.

Max values Recommended value


temperature from 0 °C to +55 °C from +10 °C to +35 °C
relative humidity from 10 % to 80 % from 20 % to 70 %

revision 0 PART 1 page 3.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S1 03.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Part 2 : INSTALLATION

CONTENTS

pages rev. date

CONTENTS I-1 to I-2 0 01/06/12

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 to 1.4 0 01/06/12


1.1 Installation procedure
1.2 Unpacking

2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2.1 to 2.3 0 01/06/12


2.1 Assembling the monitor unit
2.2 Installing the monitors
2.3 Installing the printer (optional)

3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 3.1 to 3.8 0 01/06/12


3.1 Connectors
3.2 Connections
3.2.1 Connecting the monitor unit
3.2.2 Connecting the footswitch
3.2.3 External/optional connections
3.2.4 Main power supply

4 EQUIPMENT SETUP 4.1 to 4.7 0 01/06/12


4.1 Introduction
4.2 System configuration (Setup 1)
4.3 Anatomical exam setup (Setup 2)
4.3.1 Dynamic range (version 6 only)
4.4 Anatomical DSA exam setup (Setup 5)

5 DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR SETUP 5.1 to 5.40 0 01/06/12


5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Switching-on
5.2 General Settings
5.3 Hardware Settings
5.3.1 “General” card setup
5.3.2 “Fluoroscopy” card setup
5.3.3 “Pulse” card setup
5.3.4 “Shot” card setup
5.3.5 “Fluoro on HD” card setup
5.3.6 “MaxOp / RoadMap” card setup
5.3.7 “Pre-processing” card setup
5.3.8 “Real time processing” card setup
5.3.9 "Post processing " card setup
5.3.10 “CCD camera” card setup
5.3.11 “Maintenance” card setup
5.4 Windows XP network settings

revision 0 PART 2 page I - 1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1 Physical characteristics of the network


connections
5.4.2 Administrator/Operator log-in
5.4.3 Windows XP settings
5.4.4 Network connections test
5.5 DICOM setup
5.5.1 Definition of remote DICOM devices
5.5.2 DICOM Spooler setup
5.5.3 Transmission queue management
5.5.4 IHE Settings function
5.5.5 Worklist function
5.5.6 MPPS function
5.5.7 Query / Retrieve function
5.5.8 Storage Commitment function
5.5.8.1 Spooler settings
5.6 DIP340 processor back-up

6 ANNEXES 6.1 to 6.12 0 01/06/12


6.1 Printer connections (optional)
6.1.1 Power supply connections
6.1.2 SBFM connections
6.1.3 DIP340 connections
6.1.3.1 Windows compatible printer setup
6.2 Monitor setup restore (DIP340 only)
6.3 Installation of the Medicap USB200 module
(optional – video memory versions only)
6.3.1 Electrical connections
6.3.2 General setup

revision 0 PART 2 page I - 2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The flow chart below shows the installation procedure:

START

Unpacking See para. 1.2

Mechanical installation See chapter 2

Electrical connections See chapter 3

Equipment setup See chapter 4

Video processor setup


See chapter 4
(DIP340 versions only)

Acceptance test ** See Part 3

** Installation ends with an Acceptance Test (also valid for routine and extraordinary maintenance) and
the filling-in of the relevant "test sheet".
The Acceptance Test is described in Part 3 of this manual.

Apart from the Acceptance Test, each step in the process is described in detail in the following
chapters.

Note: The system is fully adjusted in the factory to suit the user’s specific requirements.
Adjustment may only be necessary when components are replaced (see Part 4 of this manual).

Only qualified and suitably trained personnel should be allowed to install the EM equipment.

The EM equipment requires a mains power supply rated at 230V ± 10% - 50/60 Hz.

The electrical circuit to which the EM equipment is to be connected must conform to IEC
standard 60364 - Part 710 (Electrical plant in medical environments) and be properly Earthed.

revision 0 PART 2 page 1.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.2 UNPACKING

Only suitably trained personnel should be allowed to unpack the EM equipment.

To unpack the equipment:

- Cut the 4 straps around the cardboard cover.

Fig.1a

- Remove the lid (A) and the screws fixing the cardboard cover (B) to the pallet (C) and then remove
the cardboard by lifting this upwards.

Fig.1b

revision 0 PART 2 page 1.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Remove the cling-film covering the material inside.


- Extract the wooden ramp (S) and place as shown in figure 1d.
- Cut the straps securing the stand, the monitor unit and the boxes containing the monitors and accessories.
- Remove the boxes (B1 and B2) and the monitor support (D), which needs to be assembled later (see
Part 2, Chapter 2, para. 2.1).
- Remove the stand anchors (E1and E2) by undoing the screws fixing these to the pallet (C).

F1

B1

E2
E1 B2

C D

Fig.1c

- Turn the C-arm as shown in figure 1d by releasing the wig-wag brake (F1 in fig.1c) and the C-arm
rotation brake (F2 in fig.1d), then slide the station down the ramp (S).

F3

S
F2

Fig.1d

revision 0 PART 2 page 1.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Move the ramp (S) in front of the stand (figure 1e ) and then slide the stand down the ramp after
turning the handle (F3) to release the stand brake, as shown in fig. 1d.
- Remove the grid protection (F).

Fig. 1e

revision 0 PART 2 page 1.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Mechanical installation involves:


- installing the monitor support on the monitor unit,
- installing the monitors,
- installing the printer (optional) on the monitor unit.

2.1 ASSEMBLING THE MONITOR UNIT

The monitor unit is supplied with the monitor support (A) detached in a separate pack. To assemble this:

- fit the monitor support (A) on the tube (B), in the direction shown in figure 1;

- secure by tightening the 4 M6x25 screws (V) in the support.

V V

Fig. 1

revision 0 PART 2 page 2.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2 INSTALLING THE MONITORS

The LCD monitors are installed by fixing them to the support (A) using the 8 M4x16 screws (V), the flat
washer (R) and the plastic spacer (D), all supplied with the equipment.

• VIDEO MEMORY versions: fit the monitors horizontally, with the


cable entrance at the bottom (fig. 2a).
D R
A V

cable entrance

Fig. 2a

• VIDEO PROCESSOR versions: fit the monitors vertically, with the cable entrance on the left, as seen
from the rear (fig. 2b).

D R
A V

cable entrance

Fig. 2b
revision 0 PART 2 page 2.2
code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.3 INSTALLING THE PRINTER (optional)

A printer (S) can be fitted, by placing it in the printer compartment on the monitor unit.

See chapter 5 (Annexes) in this part of the manual for details of the electrical connections and printer
setup.

Fig. 3 shows the monitor unit for VIDEO PROCESSOR versions. The measurements are, in any
case, also valid for the VIDEO MEMORY versions.

Fig. 3

revision 0 PART 2 page 2.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 02.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.1 CONNECTORS

Module / Figure Connector Connected to:


Stand CM5 Monitor unit
(fig. 9) CP10 Footswitch
EQUIPOTENTIAL POINT Equipotential earth connection in X-ray theatre
Monitor unit MAINS Monitor (230 V AC power supply)
(fig. 10) EARTH Monitor (earth connection)
BNC cables (SBFM versions)
Monitor (video connection)
VGA cables (DIP340 versions)
LCD monitor BNC video cable (SBFM versions)
VIDEO IN
(fig. 11) VGA video cable (DIP340 versions)
MAINS Power supply (230V AC)
EARTH Earth connection
Rack CD100/CA MAINS Power supply (230V AC)
(SBFM VIDEO EARTH Earth connection
MEMORY versions CM1 Command signals (CM5, stand)
only)
CM2 Command signals (CM5, stand)
(fig. 12)
VIDEO IN Video output / TV camera
DIG. OUT 1 Printer (optional)
DIG. OUT 2 VIDEO IN – Working monitor
DIG. OUT 3 VIDEO IN – Reference monitor
DIP340 processor: MAINS Power supply (230V AC)
(fig. 13) B1-C1 (Video In) Video output / TV camera
B2-C1 (Camera Link) DIP 340- B7-C1
B2-C2 (Sync. Input) DIP340- B6-C1
B3-C1 (COM 1) RS232 connector for board B4 (stand)
B3-C2 (COM2) N.U.
B4-C1 (VGA) VIDEO IN – Working monitor
B4-C2 (USB) Software protection key
B4-C3 (Network) CM1 monitor unit (DICOM ETHERNET)
B4-C4 (Network) N.U.
B4-C5 (PS2) Touch-Pad
B5-C1 (USB) DVD Recorder
B5-C2 (USB) Keyboard
B5-C3 (USB) CM2 monitor unit (PEN-DRIVE)
B5-C4 (USB) System printer (optional)
B5-C5 (DVI) Via DVI-VGA convertor to reference monitor
- CM5 stand, for command signals
B6-C1
- board IR00 (infrared remote control receiver)
B6-C2 - CM5 stand, for command signals
B7-C1 (Camera Link) DIP 340- B2-C1

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.1


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

EQUIPOTENTIAL POINT

CP10
(FOOT SWITCH) CM5

fig. 9
(Stand)

REFERENCE MONITOR WORKING MONITOR

EARTH EARTH

BNC / VGA BNC/VGA

MAINS MAINS

fig. 10
(Monitor unit)

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.2


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Fig. 11a
19” colour monitor

VGA Video IN BNC Video IN Earth 230 V AC power supply


(DIP340) (SBFM)

Fig. 11b
19” monochrome monitor

DIGIT OUT1 VIDEO IN

CM2
DIGIT OUT3
CM1
DIGIT OUT2

MAIN

EARTH
Fig. 12 (rack CCD100/CA, with SBFM)

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.3


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

to B7-C1 COM1 VGA: working monitor USB: DVD recorder

USB: keyboard

to CM5 (stand)

USB: pen-drive
USB: SW Key

USB: printer (optional)


Video IN
DICOM network

COM2 (N.U.) to B2-C1

to CM5 (stand)

to B6-C1

DVI: reference

Touch-pad

Power Supply

fig. 13
(DIP340)

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.4


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.2 CONNECTIONS

The connections required during installation are described in points 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 below. These are the
same for all versions.

Note 1: See the block diagrams in figures 15a and 15b for the default connections for the video
memory / video processor versions respectively.

Note 2: See Annex 6.1 at the end of this part of the manual for details of the printer connections
(optional).

Note 3: See Annex 6.3 at the end of this part of the manual for details of the MEDICAP200 module
connections (optional).

3.2.1 MONITOR UNIT CONNECTIONS

a) Connect on each monitor:


- the Earth cable to the EARTH terminal (see figure 11 above),
- the power cable to the MAINS terminal,
- the video cable:
- BNC for SBFM video memory versions,
- VGA for DIP340 video processor versions.

b) Connect the monitor unit to terminal CM5 on the stand (see figure 9 above)

EARTH EARTH

BNC / VGA BNC/VGA

MAINS MAINS

Stand connection
(CM5)

Main power supply


(MAINS)

fig. 14

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.5


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.2.2 FOOTSWITCH CONNECTIONS

Connect the footswitch cable to terminal CP10 on the stand (see Fig. 9 above).

Note: - VIDEO MEMORY versions: the footswitch has only one pedal
- VIDEO PROCESSOR versions: the footswitch has three pedals

3.2.3 PERIPHERAL/OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS

- Connect the Ethernet cable for the DICOM network to connector CM1 on the monitor unit, as shown
in figure 15 (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only):

Fig. 15

3.2.4 MAIN POWER SUPPLY

The EM equipment must be fed with single-phase 230 V, earthed.


Maximum absorbed current is approximately 9 A in boosted fluoroscopy mode and 24 A in radiography
mode.

Check that the socket used is rated for 230 V - 16 A and that the electrical plant is earthed.

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.6


codice 66 80 012 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Fig. 16a: Connections for version with SBFM

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.7


code 66 80 011 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Fig. 16b: Connections for version with DIP340

revision 0 PART 2 page 3.8


code 66 80 011 - Mti S2 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4 EQUIPMENT SETUP

4.1 INTRODUCTION

The general setup is done directly from the control panel on the stand.

To access the setup pages:

- Press the “Attention” button after switching the


stand on.

- Press the Setup button in the FLUOROSCOPY


page.

- Enter the Password (see table below, to suit


the setup you want) in the page that now
appears: press the white square, enter the
password (e.g. 2006) and then press ENT.

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

ref.
password setup operations
(paragraphs)
1982
Setup 1
or To set the control panel language Part 2 - Para.4.2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2006
1982
Setup 2 To define the default working
or Part 2 - Para.4.3.1
ANATOMICAL EXAM SETUP parameters for anatomical exams
2006
1982 To define the default working
Setup 5
or parameters for DSA anatomical Part 2 - Para.4.3.2
ANATOMICAL DSA EXAM SETUP
2006 exams
To set the calibration parameters for
the X-ray monoblock and the X-ray
Setup 3 collimator.
2006
SET KV, I-FIL AND RX COLLIMATOR These parameters have already been Part 4 – Chap.2
calibrated in the factory and should
not be changed.
To set the working dose and adjust
the TV camera.
Setup 4
2006 These parameters have already been Part 4 – Chap.4
SET DOSE RX AND TV-CAMERA
calibrated in the factory and should
not be changed.

- The main setup selection page opens:

- Press the coloured setup button after entering the required password to access the setup you
want.

- In the case of setups with more than one page (setup 2, 3 and 5), turn the encoder fully
clockwise to access the next page; turn the encoder anti-clockwise to return to the previous
page.

- To set a parameter:
- Select it on the touch-screen: the “encoder” symbol appears.
- Set the value using the encoder.
- Confirm by pressing the encoder or select another parameter.

- Press the encoder to quit the current setup and return to the main setup selection page.
Press again to quit the setup function completely.

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Setup 1)

This menu lets you set the language for the messages on the touch-screen control panel.

Option Meaning

LANGUAGE Select language: 0 = Italian


1 = English
2 = French

All the other fields in the menu refer to factory settings and cannot be accessed.

These define the (hardware and software) options during construction of the equipment.

Option Meaning
0 = 9” I.I. tube
I.I. TUBE 1 = 12” I.I. tube

0 = SBFM video memory


1 = DIP340MR video processor
VIDEO PROCESSOR 2 = deo DIP340HR video processor
3 = DIP340HR video processor with pulsed
HCF option

0 = TV camera CD100ca (625 lines)


TV CAMERA
1 = TV camera CD1030ca (1k x 1k)

0 = FIXED ANODE monoblock


ANODE ROTATION
1 = ROTATING ANODE monoblock

Dose Area Product fitted:


DAP
1= DAP present

N° calibration pulses generated by the


CALIB. PULSE
D.A.M. (view only)

LASER fitted:
LASER
1 = LASER present

0 = 230V
POWER SUPPLY
1 = 120V

DSA function:
DSA
1= DSA present

LOGO Reseller logo

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3 ANATOMICAL EXAM SETUP (Setup 2)

The equipment allows for 5 different specialist exam types, by pre-setting the main working parameters.
These parameters are then automatically set by the equipment whenever you select an exam type.

The five exam types are:

Orthopaedic Head/Spine Abdomen Chest User

Setup 2 is split into 3 pages, as shown below:

Page 1 shows the default parameter settings:


1 2 3 4 5
EXAM
ORTHOPAEDIC HEAD ABDOMEN CHEST USER
MAX
120 120 120 120 100
KV
DOSE 1 1 1 1 0
ENABLE
1 1 1 1 0
BOOSTED
RECURS.
K=4 K=4 K=2 K=2 K=2
FILTER
DEF. PULS.
3 sec 3 sec 1 sec 1 sec 0.5 sec
RATE
AUTO
0 0 0 0 1
STORE

Page 1
Parameter Definition Settings Notes

Max kV Max kV that can be set. 80 - 120 kV

0 = low dose
Working X-ray dose. You can select either dose
Dose 1 = normal dose
level during an exam.

Enable 0 = disabled
Boosted (high mA) function enabled.
Boosted 1 = enabled
1 = (no filter)
You can change the
Weight of the recursive filter used in 2 = K2
Recurs. weight of the recursive filter
fluoroscopy mode. 4 = K4
Filter during an exam by using
8 = K8
the remote control.
16 = K16 (*)
1 image every:
You can select any of
Def. puls. 0.5s
Pulsed fluoroscopy rate. these rates during an
rate 1s
exam.
3s
Automatic saving to hard disk of the 0 = disabled Even if disabled, you can
Auto
last image in continuous fluoroscopy 1 = enabled manually command the
store
mode (LIH). saving of the LIH to HD.

(*) Note: The recursive filter settings are only K2 or K8 in the case of SBFM video memory versions.

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Page 2 shows the default parameter settings:


Note: This page only appears in the case of DIP340 video processor versions.

1 2 3 4 5
EXAM
ORTHOPAEDIC HEAD ABDOMEN CHEST USER
DEF. SAVE
12 i/s 12 i/s 6 i/s 6 i/s 3 i/s
RATE
EDGE
1 1 0 0 1
ENHAN.
SMART
0 0 1 1 0
FILTER
AUTO
0 0 1 1 0
CINELOOP
DEF. PULS.
1 1 1 1 1
MODE
DOSE
2 2 3 3 1
ZONE

Page 2
Parameter Definition Settings Notes
Saving rate in continuous fluoroscopy You can select any of
Def. save
to HD mode or pulsed HCF these rates during an
rate 1, 3, 6, 12, 25 (i/s)
fluoroscopy (optional). exam.
0 = disabled You can enable/disable
Edge Edge enhancement of LIH or saved
1 = enabled this function during post-
enhan. images.
processing.
The smart filter is a recursive filter that
prevents dragging on the image by
0 = disabled You cannot change the
eliminating any areas where
Smart 1 = enabled set parameter for the
movement is detected.
Filter exam.
Used only in continuous fluoroscopy
mode.
Automatic starting of the cineloop on
0 = disabled Even if disabled, you can
completing acquisition in continuous
Auto 1 = enabled always command the
fluoroscopy to HD mode or pulsed HCF
Cineloop cineloop manually.
fluoroscopy mode (optional)
Default exposure mode: either
0 = cont. fluoro. to HD
Def. Puls. continuous fluoroscopy to HD or You can select a different
1 = pulsed fluoro.
mode pulsed fluoroscopy (use left pedal on mode during an exam.
footswitch).
0 = 1/5 image
You can select a different
Dose Size of the reading window for 1 = 1/4 image
window size during an
zone automatic dose control. 2 = 1/3 image
exam
3 = 1/2 image

Page 3 shows the typical default parameter settings:


Note: This page only appears in the case of the DIP340HR video processor version with HCF option.

1 2 3 4 5
EXAM
ORTHOPAEDIC HEAD ABDOMEN CHEST USER
DYNAM.
1:3 1:3 1:4 1:4 1:5
RANGE

Page 3
Parameter Definition Settings Notes
To select the Dynamic Range during 1:2, 1:3, 1:4, 1:5,
You cannot change the
Dynamic Range image acquisition 1:6, 1:7, 1:8
pre-set value for the exam.
(see para. 4.3.1 below).

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.1 DYNAMIC RANGE (only for version 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter))

The Dynamic Range is the ratio between the average grey level and the max signal level supplied by
the TV camera.
The average grey level is the level of the output signal from the TV camera at the correct dose and with
uniform filtering of the X-ray beam.
The average grey level is always shown on the monitor as a value equal to half the output dynamics
(2048 LSB ±10%).

The optimal Dynamic Range value depends on the type of exam and/or the anatomical part being
irradiated.
If you go from 1:2 to 1:8 the dynamics shown on the screen expand.
For example, if you want to improve an image with glare, you need to increase the Dynamic Range
(e.g. going from 1:2 to 1:8).

The figure below shows the transfer function (LUT) for Dynamic Ranges 1:2 - 1:5 only.

Ouput signal (to monitor)

Input signal (from TV Camera)

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4 ANATOMICAL DSA EXAM SETUP (Setup 5)

Note: These exams can only be selected when DIP340 video processor versions have the DSA option.

The possible DSA anatomical exams are:

Peripheral User
Vascular DSA

Setup 5 has 2 pages, as shown in the tables below:

The figures show Pages 1 and 2 with the default parameter values.

6
7
EXAM PERIPH.
USER DSA
VASC.
MAX
120 120
KV
DOSE 1 1
ENABLE
1 1
BOOSTED
RECURS.
K=2 K=2
FILTER
DEF. PULS.
1 sec 1 sec
RATE
AUTO
0 0
STORE
6 6
7 7
EXAM PERIPH. EXAM PERIPH.
USER DSA USER DSA
VASC. VASC.
DEF. SAVE MASK
6 i/s 6 i/s 2.0 sec 2.0 sec
RATE DELAY
EDGE DYNAM.
0 0 1:4 1:4
ENHAN. RANGE
SMART
1 1
FILTER
AUTO
1 1
CINELOOP
DEF. PULS.
1 1
MODE
DOSE
3 3
ZONE

There are the same parameters as described in the paragraph above plus the following parameter:

Page 2
Parameter Definition Settings Notes
After selecting the exam,
Delay in the automatic mask pickup
Mask delay 0 - 20.0 sec. you can still change the set
after the start of X-ray emission.
time delay.

Note: The DYNAM. RANGE parameter is only shown in DIP340HR video processor versions with the HCF
option.

revision 0 PART 2 page 4.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 04
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5 DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR SETUP

5.1 INTRODUCTION

The setup procedure for the video processor is described below, with details of the parameters that can
be changed to suit specific installation needs.

The table below shows the various operations involved in each stage of setup, to be performed in the
order given:

ref
setup stage operations menus used
(paragraph)
General system - definition of the archive directory - General Settings 5.2
setup - definition of the hospital name

Parameter settings - parameters for all acquisition modes - Hardware Settings 5.3
for each - image acquisition process settings
acquisition mode
Windows XP - Windows XP settings for network - Windows XP network 5.4
network setup connection settings
(DICOM option - network connection test
only)

DICOM setup - general parameter settings - DICOM Setup 5.5


(DICOM option - definition of remote devices
only) - DICOM Spooler settings

Video processor - description of back-up procedure - Video processor back-up 5.6


back-up

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.1.1 SWITCHING-ON

After switching the equipment on:


- The working monitor displays the Study List, while the reference monitor remains blank.

On opening a new study, the two monitors display a test image that lets you adjust their brightness and
contrast.
The monitors are correctly adjusted when you can:
- see the grey box in the black square (position A),
- see the grey box in the white square (position B).

A B

See paragraph 4.5 in Part 4 of this manual for details on how to adjust the brightness and contrast
correctly.

If one of the monitors fails to display the test image and has the message “No signal on analog
VGA” instead, you should:
- check the video cable connection,
- restore the default monitor setup (see paragraph 6.3 in this part of the manual).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2 GENERAL SETTINGS

You can access the General Settings menu from both the closed archive and the study list by selecting
Setup / General Settings and entering the password “TechService”.

Electronic Circle
Settings Notes
Circle Diameter Pixel value of the diameter of Recommended value:
the image on the monitor. 1010
(900 - 1024)

Display Settings
Settings Notes
Institution Name The names only appear
Hospital name Enter the hospital name
on the monitor, not the
Station Name Equipment name Select the name of the print-outs
equipment

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

To set the image archive directory.


Archives Path
Settings Notes
Set: D:\Archives Set in the factory: do
not change.

Startup
Settings Notes
Start with Unnamed Exam The equipment lets you go Select this option if you Option disabled if
directly to the working frame of want to go directly to the DICOM MPPS option is
a new exam (“Unnamed exam”) working frame of a new present.
immediately after switching it exam after switching the
on, instead of displaying the equipment on.
Study List.

System hardware settings.


Remote Console
Settings Notes
Serial Port Number Select the serial port for Set 1 Set in the factory: do
communication with the Main not change.
Controller (stand).

To define the default image orientation before flip


command.
Flip Settings

Settings Notes
Enable Horizontal Flip Check to flip the image Normally not selected for
horizontally. DIP340HR.
Enable Vertical Flip Check to flip the image Normally selected for
vertically. DIP340HR.

To select the language for operator interface.


Language Selection
Settings Notes
Languages available:
- English
- Italian

Workstation Mode
Settings Notes
Workstation The video processor works OFF LINE (no Do not select. Select only for system
communication with the Main Controller demonstration
and the TV camera). purposes.

In-line document viewer


PDF Document Reader
Settings Notes
Path on the hard disk of the Acrord32.exe Set: Set in the factory: do
application (Acrobat Reader) needed to read not change.
the online manuals. C:\Program Files\Adobe\Acrobat
7.0\Reader\Acrord32.exe

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3 HARDWARE SETTINGS

Access the Hardware Settings menu from either the closed archive or the Study List by selecting Setup /
General Settings and then enter the password “TechService”.

This menu has several setup cards for each function and acquisition mode.

After changing the parameters in these cards, you must close the archive and open it again
to activate the new parameters.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.1 “GENERAL” CARD SETUP

General settings
General
Settings Notes
Acquisition Select one of the special working Fluoro On HD + Pulse: The equipment is
Technics Selection techniques instead of normal both functions possible. supplied with the
continuous fluoroscopy: Fluoro On HD + Pulse
Fluoro On HD Only: option enabled.
Fluoro On HD: continuous fluoroscopy continuous fluoroscopy
with automatic saving of images to with automatic saving to
HD. HD only.

Pulse: pulsed fluoroscopy at low dose. Pulse Only:


pulsed fluoroscopy only.

Enable Dose Study dose management using the Check if equipment is Set in the factory to suit
Dose Area Product. fitted with the DAP. the DAP option.

Enable Hold + The manual command used to save The equipment is


Store Reference single images to HD also transfers the supplied with this
image to the reference monitor. option disabled.
Lithotripsy – This function draws a white cross at Normally only used in
the centre of the image: operations with
Overlay Type - No Overlay: disabled lithotripsy.
- Normal Cross The equipment is
- X Cross supplied set with the
Lithotripsy – The cross at the centre of the image Select to prevent the following default
can turn or remain still during image cross from rotating with setting: No Overlay.
Overlay No Rot rotation. the image.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.2 “FLUOROSCOPY” CARD SETUP

Continuous fluoroscopy settings


Fluoroscopy
Settings Notes
Auto Store LIH LIH image management 0 Both functions
functions: disabled, The equipment is supplied with
- Save automatically to HD, both functions disabled (0).
1 Automatic saving to
- Transfer automatically to HD only,
reference monitor at next
exposure. 2 Both functions
enabled.
Rx Impulse Length of the X-ray pulse. Fixed parameter:
impossible to change.
Boost Enable To enable Boosted fluoroscopy. The equipment is supplied with
this mode enabled.
Boost Time Length of the Boosted function. Accepted range: The equipment is supplied with
(5 - 120 sec) these default settings:
10 sec – fixed anode
30 sec – rotating anode

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.3 “PULSE” CARD SETUP

Pulsed fluoroscopy settings


Pulse
Settings Notes
Auto Store LIH LIH image management 3 Both functions
functions: disabled, The equipment is
- Save automatically to HD, supplied with both
4 Automatic saving to functions disabled (0).
- Transfer automatically to HD only,
reference monitor at next
exposure. 5 Both functions
enabled.
Time Rx ON Length of X-ray exposure in The equipment is
mseconds. Multiples of 40ms supplied with this
(40, 80, 120 … 600 ms) factory setting:
360.
Impossible to change
Pre Impulse X-ray pulse stabilisation time in The equipment is
mseconds. Multiples of 40ms supplied with this
(0, 40, 80 … 320 ms) factory setting:
The video processor carries out 80.
the required image acquisition Do not change
and then displays the image at
the end of this period.
Rx Impulse Length of the X-ray pulse. Fixed parameter.
Impossible to change.
Rec Filter Weight Choice of recursive filter weight Possible settings: The equipment is
for each pulsed fluoroscopy 1 = no filter supplied with this
rate. 2 = filter weight K=2 factory setting:
4 = filter weight K=4. 2 (all rates).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.4 “SHOT” CARD SETUP

One-shot fluoroscopy settings.


Shot
Settings Notes
Time Rx ON X-ray exposure flash time (in Possible settings: The equipment is supplied
mseconds). multiples of 40ms with this factory setting:
(40, 80, 120 … 1000 ms) 800.
Do not change
Pre Impulse X-ray pulse stabilisation time in Possible settings: The equipment is supplied
mseconds. multiples of 40ms with this factory setting:
(0, 40, 80 … 320 ms) 80.
The video processor only actually Do not change
acquires the image at the end of
this period.
Rx Impulse Length of the X-ray pulse. Fixed parameter.
Impossible to change.
Average Choice of noise reduction filter Possible settings: The equipment is supplied
used during acquisition. 1 = no filter with this factory setting:
2 = average filter 2i. 16.
4 = average filter 4i. Do not change
8 = average filter 8i.
16 = average filter 16i.
Negative The image is displayed as a The equipment is supplied
negative if this function is enabled with this function disabled.
(reverse polarity).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.5 “FLUORO ON HD” CARD SETUP

Settings for :
- fluoroscopy with image saving to HD,
Fluoro On HD - DSA fluoroscopy with image subtraction
DSA is optional.
Settings Notes
Rec Filter Weight Choice of recursive filter weight Possible settings: The equipment is
for each saving to HD rate. supplied with these
- 1i/s: K= 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 default settings:
- 3 i/s: K= 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 1 i/s = 16
- 6 i/s: K= 1, 2, 4, 8 3 i/s = 8
- 12 i/s: K= 1, 2, 4 6 i/s = 4
- 25 i/s: K= 1, 2 12 i/s = 2
25 i/s = 1
Sub Log Logarithmic curve applied Accepted range: The equipment is
during acquisition for subtracted (0 - 9) supplied with this
images (DSA, optional). factory setting:
6.
Level L level of subtracted images This parameter cannot be The equipment is
(DSA, optional). set, but is calculated supplied with this
automatically to suit the calculated value:
Window: 3584.
(L+ W/2) = 4096
Window W window of subtracted images Accepted range: The equipment is
(DSA, optional). (50 - 8192) supplied with this
calculated value:
1024.
Rx Impulse Length of X-ray pulse. Fixed parameter. Impossible
to change.
AutoMask Delay Time delay for the automatic Accepted range: The equipment is
mask pickup after the start of X- (0 - 10 sec) supplied with this
ray emission. factory setting: 0.
0 = Automask disabled
The equipment uses the
delay setting set for
DSA exams.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.6 “MAX OP / ROAD MAP” CARD SETUP

The Max OP / Road Mapping modes are only possible


Max OP / Road Map with the DSA option.
Settings Notes
Sub Log Logarithmic curve applied Accepted range: The equipment is
during acquisition for subtracted (0 - 9) supplied with this
images (DSA, optional). factory setting:
6.
Level L level of subtracted images This parameter cannot be The equipment is
(DSA, optional). set, but is calculated supplied with this
automatically to suit the calculated value:
Window: 3584.
(L+ W/2) = 4096
Window W window of subtracted images Accepted range: The equipment is
(DSA, optional). (50 - 8192) supplied with this
calculated value:
1024.
Rec Filter Choice of recursive filter weight Possible settings: The equipment is
during acquisition. K= 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 supplied with this
factory setting:
2.
Max Op Delay Delay in mseconds between Accepted range: The equipment is
using the X-ray command and (0 - 1000 ms) supplied with this
the start of Max Op acquisition. factory setting:
1000.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.7 “PRE-PROCESSING” CARD SETUP

Acquisition parameter settings.


Pre-Processing
Settings Notes
Antivignetting Vignetting correction levels for Possible settings: The equipment is
the video signal. 0, 1, 2, 3. supplied without
correction (0).
Auto Offset Automatic black level correction Possible settings: The equipment is
levels for the video signal. 0, 1, 2, 3. supplied without
correction (0).
Dose Zone Default size of the image zone Possible settings: The equipment is
for automatic X-ray dose 0: 1/5 image supplied with this
control. 1: 1/4 image factory setting:
2: 1/3 image
2.
3: 1/2 image

Dynamic Range Dynamic range for acquisition. Fixed setting: This value depends on
the general equipment
1:3 adjustments and must
not be changed.
Display Dose Zone Image zone display set for Select to view zone. Normally only selected
automatic X-ray dose control. during equipment
calibration.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.8 “REAL TIME PROCESSING” CARD SETUP

Acquisition function settings


Real Time Processing
Settings Notes
Smart Filter Default setting for the smart filter 1: function automatically The equipment is
function (recursive filter with enabled. supplied with this
movement detection). function disabled (0).
0: function not
automatically enabled,
but you can still enable it
manually by using the
relevant command in the
toolbar.
Smart Sensibility Shifting sensitivity of the Smart Accepted range: The equipment is
Filter function. (0 - 15) supplied with this
factory setting:
9.
Smart Area (0..15) Size of the area where the Smart Accepted range: The equipment is
Filter function is expected to (0 - 15) supplied with this
detect movement. factory setting:
9.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.9 “POST PROCESSING” CARD SETUP

Settings of the spatial filter for Edge Enhancement


Post Processing
Settings Notes
Edge - Type Type of filter: The equipment is
During post-processing
- NONE supplied with this factory
of images you can
- SHARP (sharper edges) setting: SHARP.
change these
- SMOOTH (smoother edges)
parameters for each
Edge - Weight Filter processing weight. Accepted range:
single image.
1-5
Typically = 2

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.10 “CCD CAMERA” CARD SETUP

DIP340HR (TV camera 1k x1k).

DIP340MR (TV camera 625 lines).

Image centring settings.


CCD camera
Settings Notes
Pan Horizontal centring of the image. Accepted range: The equipment is supplied
(-8...+7) without correction (0).

Scroll Vertical centring of the image. Accepted range: The equipment is supplied
(-8...+7) without correction (0).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.11 “MAINTENANCE” CARD SETUP

Notes
Maintenance

Factory Settings Button to restore the original factory


settings.

Save As Default Save current parameters as default. Parameters are normally saved as default after
changing these during setup.
Restore Default Button to restore the previously saved
default settings.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4 WINDOWS XP NETWORK SETTINGS

Network parameter setup only required if DICOM functions available (optional).

The video processor is supplied with the factory ETHERNET settings. It is up to the company’s network manager
to alter these to suit the network to which it will be connected.

5.4.1 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR CONNECTION TO NETWORK

Type of connection present in the system:


- Type: Ethernet 10/100 Mbit at connector RJ45.
- Rate: Autosensing 10/100 Mbit.

Note: The network cabling is indicated below:

Connection between two points Connection to HUB


using crossed RJ45 cable using parallel RJ45 cable

Name NIC1 NIC2 Name Name Pin Cable Color Pin Name

TX+ 1 --- 3 RX+ TX+ 1 White/Orange 1 TX+


TX- 2 --- 6 RX- TX- 2 Orange 2 TX-
RX+ 3 --- 1 TX+ RX+ 3 White/Green 3 RX+
RX- 6 --- 2 TX- 4 Green 4
5 White/Blue 5
RX- 6 Blue 6 RX-
7 White/Brown 7
8 Brown 8

5.4.2 ADMINISTRATOR / OPERATOR LOG-IN

You need to access the system as the network administrator in order to set the system up.
To do this, with processor already running:

- Close the DIP340 application.

- Click on START in the Windows task-bar and select Shut Down...

- Then select Log Off Operator in the page that now appears and press OK.

- Enter the following codes in the new page:


- User name: Administrator
- Password: dgt_IIE.17
- Press OK.

Note: To return to normal operator mode, repeat the above steps, selecting Log Off Administrator and entering:
- User name: operator
- Password: operator.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.3 WINDOWS XP SETTINGS

To set the video processor network functions, first


exit the DIP340 application. Select START in the
Windows task-bar and then:

- Settings / Network Connections.

The following frame appears:

- Select Local Area Connection 1 (UP)

The following frame appears:

- Select Properties.

- Then select
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

- Click on Properties.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

The following frame appears:

- Enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for


the workstation (as indicated by the hospital
network administrator).

5.4.4 NERTWORK CONNECTION TEST

After entering and confirming the network settings, you must test the connections.

- Activate the DOS Prompt in the applications bar by


selecting:

Programs / Accessories / Command Prompt

- Enter the command PING followed by the IP Address (provided by the network administrator) of
another device in the network at the DOS prompt and then press Enter.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- The following page appears if the network settings are correct:

- We recommend repeating the PING command for the other devices in the network.

- If, however, the page below appears, there is a setup error and so you need to check both the cable
and the network settings.

- Close the DOS window after completing the test (exit).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5 DICOM SETUP

After making the local network connections, the DICOM network setup procedure involves the following
operations:

- Definition of DICOM AE Title for the video processor


- Definition of the remote DICOM devices
- Connection test for DICOM devices
- Setup of the parameters for the Dicom Spooler application responsible for managing network
transmission of images
- Setup of each DICOM mode

The following menus are used for these operations:


- Dicom Setup for the DICOM connection setup,
- Dicom Spooler for image network transmission.

• Access the Dicom Setup menu from the Study List:


- Select DICOM / SETUP and then enter the password “TechService”.

Local DICOM addressing

Store CD ROM

Print

IHE / Worklist / MPPS /


Storage Commitment /
Query Retrieve

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Local DICOM addressing


Settings Notes
Local AE Title Name of device in the DICOM network. Typically: DIP340
These parameters are
agreed with the
TCP Port Server Code used for the TCP port used by the Typically: 104 hospital network
device. administrator.

The Store function transfers the images to a


Store server.
Settings Notes
Writings on image Select to transfer also the external text Recommended setting
(patient name, image n°, etc.) as shown
on the monitor.
Graphics on image Select to transfer also any text and Recommended setting
graphics the operator has added to the
image.
Num. Bits per pixel Depth of the image to be sent to the Typically: 8
server.

The Print function transfers the images to a


Print DICOM printer.
Settings Notes
Num. Bits per pixel Depth of the image to be sent to the Typically: 8
printer.

The CD-ROM function sends the images to a


CD-ROM CD / DVD.
Settings Notes
Writings on image If selected, the images saved to CD/DVD Recommended setting
will have the external text (patient name,
image n°, etc.) exactly as seen on the
monitor.
Graphics on image If selected, the images saved to CD/DVD Recommended setting
will have any text and graphics added by
the operator.
Num. Bits per pixel Depth of the image to be saved on the Typically: 8
CD / DVD.
Character set Type of character used to send the This must be the same
DICOM parameters. as that set in the
Windows and
keyboard properties.

IHE Settings: see para. 5.5.4.

Worklist Settings: see para. 5.5.5.

MPPS Settings: see para. 5.5.6.

Q/R Settings: see para. 5.5.7.

Storage Commitment Settings: see para. 5.5.8.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

• Access the DicomSpooler menu from the Windows task bar:

Definition of network devices


( see para. 5.5.1)

DICOM Spooler setup


( see para. 5.5.2)

5.5.1 DEFINITION OF THE REMOTE DICOM DEVICES

Select Network in the DICOM Spooler menu and then enter the password “TechService”.
The DICOM Setup frame opens. This lets you define the devices connected to the video processor, using
these cards:

• Local
• Rem 1, 2, …

Local: video processor DICOM


parameters setup card with default
DICOM devices.

Rem: DICOM parameters setup card


for the remote devices to which the
video processor can be connected.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

The equipment is typically supplied with settings for 3 remote devices:


- PACS
- PRINTER
- WORKLIST

These provide an example of the setup possibilities. You can add (or remove) a device using these
commands:

Add Remote To add a remote device to the network, thus creating its own card.
Remove Remote To remove a remote device from the network by removing its card.
Verify To check that the video processor and a selected remote device are connected
correctly.

Note: The connection test in the DicomSpooler menu requires that you enter the name specified in
the Local AE Title for quick remote verification field (see below).

• Set the default devices for each DICOM mode in the Local card:

Default Remote Storage Enter the name of the default DICOM device (if any) that acts as the Server for exam
AE Title archiving. When you use the DICOM STORE command in the working frame, the
exams are automatically sent to the server specified here.
Default Remote Printer Enter the name of the default DICOM device (if any) that acts as the Printer Server
AE Title when printing exams. When you use the DICOM PRINT command in the working
frame, the exams are automatically sent to the server specified here.
Default Worklist Server Enter the name of the default DICOM device (if any) that acts as the Worklist Server.
AE Title The Worklist Server is the DICOM device that sends the list of exams required.
Default MPPS Server Enter the name of the default DICOM device (if any) that acts as the default MPPS
AE Title Server. The MMPS server is informed of the performance and completion of the study
received from the Worklist in order to update the status of the programmed exams.
Local AE Title for quick Enter the Local AE Title (name of the device in the DICOM network) already entered
remote verification in the DICOM setup (see paragraph 5.5.1 above).
UL Protocol Do not change the data already entered (usually those shown in the figure above).
Max non-Jpeg Store Size Set 100 MB

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.24


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

• You need to define the parameters for each device using the relevant Rem card:

Rem card:

Custom Name Standard name of the DICOM device (held by the installer).

AE Title Name given to the DICOM device by the network administrator.

IP Address IP address of the DICOM device in the local network.

Port TCP port used by the remote DICOM device.

Printer Model ID (type / model) of the DICOM printing device (PRINT devices only).

Character Set Type of character used to send DICOM parameters.

This defines the DICOM functions for the device:


Verify Device test
St. Cmt STORAGE COMMITMENT
Print PRINTER SERVER
Q/R QUERY/RETRIEVE
Worklist WORKLIST SERVER
MPPS MPPS SERVER
Store STORE SERVER
Operations
St. Cmt AE Title AE Title for the STORAGE COMMITMENT, which may differ from the AE Title
for the STORE SERVER.
Jpeg Select only if the STORE SERVER cannot manage JPEG compressed
Unsupported images (in both XA and RF modes).
Query/Retrieve Defines the Query/Retrieve modes:
Use “Patient Root” Search using the patient name.
mode
Use “Study Root” Search using the study type.
mode
Print Defaults The Defaults Setup command opens the menu that lets you set the parameters for PRINT
devices:

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.25


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

General Default settings, to be agreed with the installer of the DICOM printer.

Film To set the film dimensions:


Film Size Film size.
Orientation Orientation of the image on the film.
Enable free orientation To get free image orientation (in the case of STANDARD 1,1 format) to
on STANDARD\1,1 optimise the space on the film.
Format Print format (standard, rows or columns).
Cols Number of images per column.
Rows Number of images per row.
Image Default settings, to be agreed with the installer of the DICOM printer.
Processing
Save To save the new settings.

Exit To quit the menu without saving any changes.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.26


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.2 DICOM SPOOLER SETUP

The images to be sent are initially placed in a transmission queue in a dedicated memory area on the
HD.
The DicomSpooler application then picks up the images from this area and sends them to the network.

• Access the DicomSpooler menu from the Windows task bar:

List of images in the transmission queue

Alarm area To clear any alarms To confirm settings and To hide the application
close the application without closing it

- To open the Spooler Settings menu: select Setup / Options and enter the password “TechService”.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.27


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

This menu lets you set the transmission queue by using the parameters defined in 4 panels:

• Spool directory:

Path Path where the data transmission queue sits. Usually:


“C:\ProgramFiles\Digitec\Dicom\DicomSpooler\SpoolDir\”
Size Size in MB of the transmission queue (size of the Spooler).
Usual setting: 500 MB.

• Retry:

After This specifies the time (seconds) between two transmission attempts.
Usual value: 180 seconds
Note: After 3 failed transmission attempts the transmission is “failed”.

• Failed items: this specifies the type of images whose transmission has failed for whatever reason.

Keep till manually deleted To keep the exams in the transmission queue until manually removed.
Keep for XX days To keep the exams in the transmission queue for the set number of days, after which
they are automatically deleted.

• Warning setup: to select the alarms that will cause the Dicom Spooler frame to open.

Warn if spooldir level Alarm warning that the transmission queue is too full. Usual value: 80%.
greater than xx %
Warn if queue disabled Alarm warning that transmission queue filling has been stopped.

Warn if there is not enough Alarm warning that there is not enough space in the transmission queue.
spooldir space
Warn if error in item Alarm warning that there are errors in the transmission queue.
insertion
Warn if item processing Alarm warning that the transmission of the image has failed.
fails
Warn if there are in list Alarm warning that images have been in the transmission queue for more than xx
items older than xx days days.
Warn if there are in list Alarm warning that more than xx images are in the transmission queue.
more than xx items
Warn if there are in list Alarm warning that more than xx images are in the transmission queue whose
more than xx failed items transmission has failed.
Check warning status at To enable the alarm check when the application is opened and, if there are alarms,
startup the DICOM Spooler frame opens showing these.
Show spooler on warning To enable the display of the DICOM Spooler frame every time an alarm is generated
activation (recommended option).

Note: The DICOM Spooler menu also lets you manage any images in the transmission queue. See next
paragraph below.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.28


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.3 MANAGING THE TRANSMISSION QUEUE

The DicomSpooler application lets you manage any images left in the transmission queue.

Operations Enable/Disable Status

The Status panel shows the status of the images in the transmission queue:

Waiting Number of images in the queue


Failed Number of images not sent due to errors or malfunctions
In progress Number of images being sent
Spooldir filling level Filling level (in %) of the transmission queue

These commands let you manage the images left in the transmission queue:

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable Queue To enable/disable the filling of the transmission queue


Enable/Disable Spool To enable/disable the transmission of the images in the queue

Operations

Delete To delete one or more items from the queue


Reschedule To reprogram a new transmission of a “failed” image

- During normal activity you should have:


Status Queue: Enabled
Status Spool: Enabled

- Use the Enable/Disable panel buttons to reverse this status and so enable the Operations panel
commands:
Status Queue: Disabled
Status Spool: Disabled

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.29


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Using the Operations commands you can delete the images in the queue (Delete) or manage a new
transmission request (Reschedule):

Send again as soon as possible

Set time and date for retransmission

Set number of transmission attempts

- Restore the normal operating status by using the Enable/Disable buttons to get:
Status Queue: Enabled
Status Spool: Enabled

5.5.4 IHE SETTINGS FUNCTION

IHE compliance (Integrating Healthcare Environment) lets you integrate the DICOM functions available
for the equipment with the other DICOM components to which it is connected.
This function is only possible with the following DICOM services: Worklist, MPPS, Store and Storage
Commitment.

There are certain rules provided in the official documents (IHE Radiology Technical Framework) that
apply here, as well as others from the manufacturer (IHE Integration Statement).

Use the IHE Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu to open the IHE Setup menu. This defines the
various options:

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.30


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

SWF:

ACT: Acquisition Modality To enable the SWF profile (Scheduled Workflow).

MWL Replace Item if Same Access Num. To replace an old patient with a new one having the same Accession
Number in the Worklist every time you use the GetList command.

Depending on the settings, some dialog boxes may vary.

If you enable the SWF profile, it will be impossible to change some data as these are fixed by the IHE
standard. For example, when you use the keys to access the Code Sequence, this will open in “read-
only” mode.

The Study Data dialog box will look like this when the SWF options are enabled:

The Study Data dialog box will look like this when the SWF options are disabled:

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.31


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.5 WORKLIST FUNCTION

The Worklist Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the Dicom Worklist Setup menu used to
define the available options:

● Dicom Get List to define the Worklist reception mode:

Modality Filter CR Accept all studies with code CR


XA Accept all studies with code XA
RF Accept all studies with code RF

● Study Create to define the Worklist management mode:

Build description from procedure text To copy the contents of the DICOM Procedure field in the exam
Description.
Build description from step text To copy the contents of the DICOM Step field in the exam Description.

Insert Pr. and St. in description To copy the two prefixes Pr. and St. in the exam Description (i.e. first the
contents of the DICOM Procedure field and then the contents of the
DICOM Step field).

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.32


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

● Study Create - Identifiers to define the conformation of the DICOM MPPS TAGS from the DICOM
WORKLIST TAGS.

Performed Procedure Type Description When sending data to the MPPS service, the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Requested Procedure Requested Procedure Description field received from the Worklist
Description” are copied in the Performed Procedure Type Description field.
Performed Procedure Code Sequence When sending data to the MPPS service, the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Requested Procedure Requested Procedure Code Sequence field received from the
Code Sequence” Worklist are copied in the Performed Procedure Code Sequence
field.
Performed Procedure Step ID

- Enable copy from “Scheduled Procedure Step - When sending data to the MPPS service, the contents of the
ID” Scheduled Procedure Step ID field received from the Worklist are
copied in the Performed Procedure Step ID field.

- When sending data to the MPPS service, if the Scheduled


- Enable copy from “Study ID” Procedure Step ID field received from the Worklist is empty, the
contents of the Study ID field received from the Worklist are
copied in the Performed Procedure Step ID field.
Performed Procedure Step Description When sending data to the MPPS service, the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Scheduled Procedure Step Scheduled Procedure Step Description field received from the
Description” Worklist are copied in the Performed Procedure Type Description
field.
Performed Protocol Code Sequence When sending data to the MPPS service, the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Scheduled Protocol Code Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence field received from the
Sequence” Worklist are copied in the Performed Protocol Code Sequence
field.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.33


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.6 MPPS FUNCTION

The MPPS Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the MPPS Setup menu used to define the
available options:

General Settings:

Enable Server Notification To enable communication with the MPPS server. If disabled, the MPPS
objects can be created and edited locally, but never sent.
Enable MPPS On New Studies To enable the MPPS server upon creating a new study.
Dicom Direct Print is Dicom Transfer The management of the MPPS server treats a DICOM Print command
exactly as a DICOM Store command.
Dicom Direct Media Write is Dicom The management of the MPPS server treats the sending of an image to
Transfer the CD recorder exactly as a DICOM Store command.

Server Notification Conditions:

On Open study if MPPS already Exists To enable the sending of the MPPS N-CREATE message upon opening
a study if the MPPS server was already associated to this in a previous
session.
On New Image Acquisition To enable the sending of the MPPS N-CREATE message on completion
of image acquisition.
Before Image Dicom Transfer To enable the sending of the MPPS N-CREATE message or the N-SET
message immediately before sending to a DICOM STORE or PRINT
device or to the CD recorder.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.34


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

After Image Dicom Transfer To enable the sending of the MPPS N-CREATE message or the N-SET
message immediately after sending to a DICOM STORE device.
Note: MPPS messages never send images to a DICOM PRINT device or
CD recorder.
After Image Storage Commitment: N.A.

On Image Modification To enable the sending of the MPPS N-CREATE message immediately
after editing an image.
On Close Study (N-Create + N_Set): To send the MPPS N-CREATE message after closing a study (if not
already sent).
This is a general option. Details of the MPPS function on closing an
exam are explained below: see On Close Study N-SET Notification.

On Close Study N-SET Notification:

Auto Always The MPPS N-SET message is always sent automatically.

Auto if New Acquired Images The MPPS N-SET message is only sent automatically if new images have
been acquired.
Auto if Dicom Transferred Images The MPPS N-SET message is only sent automatically if images have
been sent to a DICOM STORE device.
Auto if MPPS already Created on Server The MPPS N-SET message is only sent automatically if the MPPS N-
CREATE message has already been sent.
Ask Operator if No Auto Conditions The operator is asked to confirm sending of the MPPS N-SET message.

MPPS Contents:

Performed Procedure Step ID (If Empty The Study ID field is used to provide the value for the Performed
enable copy from Study ID): Procedure Step ID field, if this is empty on receipt from the Worklist and
the operator has not added any value manually.
Dose Comment To add a comment to the dose value in the MPPS message.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.35


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.7 QUERY / RETRIEVE FUNCTION

The Query/Retrieve Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the Query/Retrieve Setup menu
used to define the options available:

Calling AE Title To specify the AE Title the video processor will use for the Query / Retrieve (can
be the same as the Local AE Title set in the DICOM SETUP frame).
Default Called AE Title To specify the AE Title of the remote device offering the Query / Retrieve
service.
Move Store Server Port TCP port of the device offering the Query / Retrieve service.
Saved File-set Character set Type of character used to send DICOM parameters.

Base Retrieve Folder To specify the directory on the video processor HD to contain the exams
received from the remote Query / Retrieve device (typically C:\Retrieve)
Viewer Command Line To specify the path needed to run the DICOM viewer for the exams received
from the Query / Retrieve server.
Typically C:\ProgramFiles\Digitec\DgViewer\Bin\DgViewer.exe
View Study On Retrieve If checked, the study is automatically shown on the screen after receipt, using
the specified DICOM viewer.
If not checked, the exam needs to be opened manually (see User Manual).
Close Q/R On View Study If checked, the Query / Retrieve window closes automatically when the
selected study is opened.
If not checked, the window remains open and ready for a new search.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.36


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.8 STORAGE COMMITMENT FUNCTION

The Storage Commitment Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the Storage Commitment
Settings menu used to define the options available:

General:

Enable Storage Commitment con The Storage Commitment function is automatically associated to a new study.
new Studies If disabled, the images in a study enabled for Storage Commitment are
marked as “auto-committed”.

Spooler Notifications:

Enable Spooler Notifications on Stg To activate the spooler notification mechanism inside the video processor for
Cmt Disabled Studies studies not enabled for Storage Commitment.
A symbol appears in the image frame showing the operator the spooler store
result (see table):

Storage Commitment Status Image Marker


Pending

Store OK

Store FAIL

Autocommit OK

Spooler Notifications Expiration Max time-out for a spooler notification in days.


Time (1-7 days):
Spooler Notifications Queue Max Max transmission queue length for spooler notifications.
Length (10-200):

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.37


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Storage Commitment Transactions – SCT:

SCT N-EVENT_REPORT Wait T.O. (3-60 Timeout for N-EVENT_REPORT response after sending the N-ACTION
sec) message.
SCT Expiration Time Timeout for waiting for the SCT confirmation.
(1-7 days)
SCT Max Retry Count Max number of SC retries (sending of the N-ACTION message and receipt
(1 – 5) of the N-EVENT-REPORT response).
SCT Retry Delay Interval between one SC attempt and the next (min time between
(5-300 sec) sending any two N-ACTION messages).

Image deleting:

Non Stored Images To define what to do on receipt of an image deletion request when the images
concerned have yet to be sent to the spooler.
Always Enabled Deletion always permitted.
Never Enabled Deletion never permitted.
Warn & Ask Operator Deletion only permitted after confirmation.
Store Pending / To define what to do on receipt of an image deletion request when the images
Stg Cmt Pending Images concerned have already been sent to the spooler, but the SCT (Storage
Commitment Transaction) is still pending.
Never Enabled Deletion never permitted.
Warn & Ask Operator Deletion only permitted after confirmation.
Stg Cmt Failed Images Deletion if images where the Storage Commitment has failed.

Never Enabled Deletion never permitted.


Warn & Ask Operator Deletion only permitted after confirmation.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.38


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.8.1 SPOOLER SETTINGS

The Storage Commitment request can be sent to any Store server in the network.
For this reason, you can associate a Storage Commitment periphery to each Store server using the
remote periphery option in the Spooler setup menu.

St.Cmt AE Title: The AE Title for the Store device is used if this field is left blank.

If you specify the AE Title, you also need to set this in the DICOM device Setup
menu by using the St.Cmt enabled flag.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.39


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.6 DIP340 PROCESSOR BACK-UP

After installing the system we recommend that you save the video processor setup data by making a
copy of the system hard disk via the creation of a back-up CD/DVD (ghost disk), to be kept by the
Technical Service.

The back-up guarantees fast resetting of the system functions and settings in the event of a hardware
problem with hard disk or corruption of the data held on the HD.

The procedure for saving the data is explained in Part 5, para. 6.1:
- Creating a back-up CD/DVD for the video processor.

revision 0 PART 2 page 5.40


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6 ANNEXES

6.1 PRINTER CONNECTIONS (optional)

6.1.1 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

The 230V AC power supply for the printer comes from connector CP11 (pin 1-3) on board ASPS 00 (B20),
at the rear of the monitor unit (see layout):

Board ASPS 00 (B20)

Note: Do not use a printer requiring more than 200V AC

6.1.2 CONNECTION WITH VIDEO MEMORY (SBFM)

SONY video printer (model UP960 or UP980).

The printer has these connectors:


- MAIN: power supply
- EARTH: earth connector
- VIDEO IN: video signal input
- VIDEO OUT: video signal output

The video signal is picked up by the DIGIT OUT 1 connector on rack CCD100/CA (see figure below):

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6.1.3 CONNECTIONG WITH VIDEO PROCESSOR (DIP340)

Any Windows compatible printer may be connected to the equipment.


The printer can then be used to get print-outs of each image in BMP format.

There is a USB port on the rear of the video processor rack for connecting the printer:

Printer (USB port)

6.1.3.1 WINDOWS COMPATIBLE PRINTER SETUP

Access the system as Administrator (see para. 4.4.2 above) in order to set up the printer. Then:

- Press Start in the applications bar and select Settings / Printers and Faxes:

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select Add a Printer in the Printers menu:

- Press Next.

- Select Local printer and press Next.

- Set the local port that the printer is


connected to (USB) and press Next.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select the printer model from the list or, if


provided with the printer, use the
installation CD and then press Next.

- Enter a name for the printer and then press


Next.

- Select Yes and then press Next to print


out a test page.

- The printer setup is now completed. Press


Finish to end the procedure.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6.2 MONITOR SETUP RESTORE (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only)

The video processor is supplied as standard with the following monitor setup:

Multiple Display > Extended Desktop

If the system loses this setup, you can restore it as follows:

- Close the DIP340 application.

- Switch off the processor: click on START in the Windows task-bar and select Shut Down > Shut
Down.

- Switch the monitor unit off using the key.

- Check the connections of the 2 monitors.

- Switch the monitor unit on again and wait a few seconds.

- Close the DIP340 application.

- Press START in the Windows task-bar and then select:


Control Panel > Intel(R) GMA Driver.

- Select the Scheme Options command in the main application page (Display Devices menu) as
shown below:

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select the required setting in the Select a Scheme menu: “configurazione monitor dip340” and
press OK.

- Check that the two monitors are correctly set, as shown below (main page):

Note: The Primary Device is the WORKING MONITOR connected to the VGA port, while the Secondary
Device is the REFERENCE MONITOR connected to the DVI port via a DVI/VGA video adapter.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Press Apply.

- Select the Display Settings menu and check that the two monitors are correctly set (in the
Monitor and Digital Television pages):

- Press Apply and then OK.

- Reboot the video processor: press START in the Windows task-bar and then select:
Shut Down > Restart.

- Once the video processor is switched on again, make sure that the video format is loaded
correctly. If not, repeat the above procedure.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6.3 INSTALLATION OF THE MEDICAP USB200 MODULE (OPTIONAL FOR VIDEO MEMORY VERSIONS)

6.3.1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

INPUT: video input MAIN: power socket

OUTPUT: video output USB: keyboard connection

USB: PEN-DRIVE connection

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6.3.2 GENERAL SETUP

Use the main menu to access the MediCap USB200 settings and options.

Press the Menu button on the front panel to view the main menu. Use the Next and Back buttons to
explore the various submenus. Use the Select button to select a menu option.

Back Select Next

Menu

MAIN MENU

The main submenus are:

• Setup: to set the clock, language and input option. This menu can also be used to enable and
set up the “Patient Information” function that lets you enter the patient data.

• Image: to select the image format and resolution.

• Video: to select the acquisition quality for video films.

• Advanced: to select the advanced options. You can also view all the current settings and restore
the default factory settings.

• Volume: N.U.

• Exit: to quit the main menu.

The submenus are described below.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

SETUP:

Clock
Date / Time stamp

Choice of language

Video input options

Patient data

• Date / Time: Use this menu to set the internal clock. You can also select an option that lets you
view the “date/time stamp” on the images.
Note: A question mark will appear in the top right-hand corner of the Setup
Menu if you fail to set the clock.

• Language: Use this menu to select the language you want to use for the menus.

• Input Options: Use this menu to select the video input type (Composite BNC) and the video
system (PAL).

• Patient Information: Use this menu to enable and set up the Patient Information function, letting you
enter the patient data at the start of each new imaging session. You can also
include the data in the names given to the image files and print these on the
images.

Patient Information function setup


Press the Menu button in the front panel to enable to view the main Menu. Then select “Setup” and
select “Patient Information”. The Patient Info Setup Menu appears. Set “Get information on patient”
as “Yes”.
Then set the following options:

• Add Info to file name? – This lets you specify which patient information (if any) you want to include
automatically in the name of the card and files. The options here are:

o None No patient information will be added to the card and file names
o Name To add the patient’s name
o ID To add the patient ID
o Name+ID To add both the patient’s name and the patient ID

• Add Info Stamp to images? – This lets you print the patient info on each photo (not on films). Options:
o None
o Top left, Top right, Bottom left, Bottom right, (patient info appears in the relevant area).

The following information appears on the images: Name, surname, sex and patient ID.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

IMAGE OPTIONS:

Format

Resolution

Anti-blurring option

Multi-shot option

Use the Image Options menu to set the image acquisition mode.

• Format: Use this submenu to select the image format when saving photos (JPG, TIFF, PNG or
DICOM). Recommended setting: JPG.

• Resolution: Use this submenu to select the resolution (pixels) for acquired images (Natural, 1024 x
768, 800 x 600 or 640 x 480). Recommended setting: Natural.

• Anti-Blur: Use only if the image is blurred due to shifting (Active / Not active). Recommended
setting: Not active.

• Multi-Shot: Use this submenu to enable/disable multi-shot acquisition (Active / Not active). A
single photo is acquired when you press the Capture Photo button if the “Multi-Shot”
function is not active; three photos are acquired if active. Recommended setting:
Not active.

VIDEO OPTIONS:

Quality

Time Limit

Sound Recording

Format

Use the Video Options menu to set the film acquisition mode.

• Quality: Use this submenu to select the video quality. Possible levels:
• Low (DVD-): 352 x 240 pixel, 1.5 Mbps variable bit rate (VBR)
• Normal (DVD): NTSC (720 x 480 pixels) / PAL (720 x 576 pixels), 3.5 Mbps VBR
• High (DVD+): NTSC (720 x 480 pixels) / PAL (720 x 576 pixels), 8 Mbps VBR
Note: The size of the format file is directly proportional to the video quality.

• Time Limit: Use this submenu to set the time limit for the films: if not “Unlimited”, the film will
automatically stop recording after a specified time (Unlimited, 5 sec.,..)

• Sound Recording: N.U.

• Format: MPEG2.

revision 0 PART 2 page 6.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Part 3 : ACCEPTANCE

CONTENTS

pages rev. date

CONTENTS I.1 0 01/06/12

1 ACCEPTANCE TEST 1.1 to 1.9 0 01/06/12


1.1 Cable and connector checks
1.2 Mechanical checks
1.3 Electrical checks
1.4 Image quality and system checks
1.5 Test sheet

2 ANNEX: X-RAY DOSE AND IMAGE QUALITY CHECKS 2.1 to 2.13 0 01/06/12
2.1 Checking the X-ray dose intensity in continuous
fluoroscopy
2.2 Checking the automatic X-ray dose control mode
2.3 Grey scale
2.4 Spatial resolution
2.5 Image uniformity
2.6 Image distortion
2.7 Noise level
2.8 Minimum contrast
2.9 Resolution with low contrast and MTF curve
2.10 I.I. tube conversion factor
2.11 Dose Area Meter efficiency test
2.12 Checking the Kerma and Kerma Ratio indications

revision 0 PART 3 page I - 1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 00.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 ACCEPTANCE TEST

The acceptance test covers all the checks and tests listed in the TEST SHEET.

The various checks described below are split into the following groups:
- Cable and connector checks.
- Mechanical checks.
- Electrical checks.
- Image quality and system checks.

Each operation is identified by a code, used in the TEST SHEET.

1.1 CABLE AND CONNECTOR CHECKS

Visually check each cable and connector for signs of damage or crushing:

A.1 Equipment power supply cable and connector.


A.2 Monitor unit / stand cable and connector.
A.3 Stand cable sheath (connection between table and C-arm).
A.4 Footswitch cable and connector.
A.5 X-ray control button cable.

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.2 MECHANICAL CHECKS

Check:
- Movement: all movement must be smooth and easy.
- Brakes: brakes must be efficient and easy to engage/release.
- Component fixing: check for play, indicating loose screws (panels, monitor, X-ray warning
light).
- Safety devices: check for breakage or dents that may affect the efficiency and/or safety of the
equipment.

The individual checks are:

B.1 C-arm sliding.


B.2 C-arm sliding brake.
B.3 C-arm rotation.
B.4 C-arm rotation brake.
B.5 Horizontal C-arm movement.
B.6 Horizontal C-arm movement brake.
B.7 C-arm angling (wig-wag).
B.8 C-arm angling brake.
B.9 Column up/down movement.
B.10 Smooth movement of stand wheels.
B.11 Parking brakes on stand wheels.
B.12 ±90° rotation of rear stand wheels.
B.13 Smooth movement of monitor unit wheels.
B.14 Parking brakes on monitor unit wheels.
B.15 Fixing of monitors to monitor unit.
B.16 Fixing of the X-ray warning lamp support to the monitor unit.
B.17 Fixing of the panels on the monitor unit.
B.18 Fixing of the panels on the stand.
B.19 State of monoblock cover.
B.20 State of the control panel on the monitor unit.
B.21 State of the control panel on the stand.
B.22 State and efficiency of the general on/off key switch on the monitor unit.

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3 ELECTRICAL CHECKS

These consist in checking:


- Safety devices
- Warnings
- Exposure functions
- Compliance with radiological parameters.

The table below sets out the full procedure, with the individual checks that appear in the Test Sheet.

version
operations code
SBFM DIP340

- With the equipment switched off: X X

Remove the panels on the stand, on the TV camera, on the I.I. tube and on
the monitor power unit.

Check the state of the keyboard + touchpad on the monitor unit (dirt and C.1 X
corrosion).
Check the state of the monitor unit power unit components (dirt and corrosion). C.2 X X
Check the state of the boards and components in the stand rack (dirt and C.3 X X
corrosion).
- Return and fix the panels. X X
Connect the stand to the monitor unit, connect the footswitch and connect the
monitor unit to the electricity mains.
- Switch the monitor unit on. X X
Check that the 2 fans on the rear of the monitor unit start. C.4 X
Check that the LED for the ON button on the stand control panel lights up. C.5 X X
Check that the UNNAMED patient image frame appears correctly on the working C.6 X
monitor.
Return to the Study List frame using the touchpad. C.7 X
- Switch the stand on. X X
Check (after the pause) that the square marker appears on both monitors (top C.8 X
left-hand corner) and the number 1 appears on the reference monitor.
Check the successful completion of the initialising test: all the LEDs on the control C.9 X X
panel should light up (one at a time) and then the word READY should appear on
the display, together with the radiological parameters.
Make sure that the monoblock fans come on (check via the ventilation panels). C.10 X X
Press the emergency button on the monitor unit and check that the entire C.11 X X
equipment switches off.
- Reset the emergency button and then start the equipment again. X X
Press the emergency button on the stand and check that the entire equipment C.12 X X
switches off.
- Reset the emergency button and then start the equipment again. X X
- Use all 4 stand column control keys and check that: X X
The column moves up and down smoothly. C.13 X X
Check that the speed at which the column moves is that indicated in Part 5, X X
para.1.2.3 C.38
- Select continuous fluoroscopy, collimator fully open, normal I.I. field. X X
- Place one of the provided copper filters (2 mm thick) in the X-ray beam (near the X X
collimator).
- Give the X-ray command and check that: X X
The X-ray warning light comes on. C.14 X X
The image appears on the monitor. C.15 X X
The word FLUOROSCOPY and the radiological parameters appear on the stand C.16 X X

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

control panel.
The FLUORO icon appears in the image frame and the word LIVE also appears C.17 X
during exposure, replaced by LIH at the end of exposure.
The kV on the display are the same (or within the tolerance) as those indicated C.18 X X
on the "X-ray Dose Check" sheet supplied with the equipment.

Repeat, using both copper filters (total 4 mm).


Check the correct positioning of the X-ray collimator iris on all I.I. fields. C.19 X X
- Remove the copper filters from the X-ray beam and place a phantom on the X X
leading edge of the I.I. tube.
- Select fluoroscopy to HD at a rate of 3i/s. X
- Give the exposure command and check that: X
The word FLUOROSCOPY and the radiological parameters appear on the stand C.20 X
control panel.
The FLUORO on HD icon appears in the image frame and the word LIVE also C.21 X
appears during exposure, replaced by the number of the run at the end of
exposure.
- Select pulsed fluoroscopy. X X
- Give the exposure command and check that: X X
The word PULSED and the radiological parameters appear on the stand control C.22 X X
panel.
The PULSE icon appears in the image frame and the word LIVE also appears C.23 X
during exposure, replaced by LIH at the end of exposure.
- Select "one shot" fluoroscopy. X X
- Give the exposure command by pressing the footswitch until the end of exposure X X
and check that:
The words ONE SHOT and the radiological parameters appear on the stand C.24 X X
control panel.
The ONE SHOT icon appears in the image frame and the word LIVE also appears C.25 X
during exposure, replaced by the number of the run at the end of exposure.
- Select “road mapping” fluoroscopy (optional) X
- Give the exposure command and check that: X
The word FLUOROSCOPY and the radiological parameters appear on the stand C.26 X
control panel.
The MAX OP. icon and the words MAX OP. appear in the image frame. Give the C.27 X
command for a new exposure and check that the words change to ROAD MAP.
- Select radiography. X X
- Set 40 kV and 200 mAs. X X
- Give the exposure command by pressing the button and check that: C.28 X X
The exposure time (on the stand display) is 3.1 s (± 15%).
- Set 80 kV and 130 mAs. X X
- Give the exposure command by pressing the button and check that: C.29 X X
The exposure time (on the stand display) is 3.7 s (± 15%).
- Set 100 kV and 100 mAs. X X
- Give the exposure command by pressing the button and check that: C.30 X X
The exposure time (on the stand display) is 3.6 s (± 15%).
With no X-ray emission, C.31 X
- Check the virtual collimators on the monitor by using the collimator commands.
- Use the command to transfer the LIH to the reference monitor and check that the C.32 X
image is transferred and that the patient data are correct.
If the equipment uses the Dose Area Meter (optional): C.33 X X
- Check the accumulated dose and that this is shown correctly on the stand
control panel (see para. 2.11 in Part 3)
- Check that the accumulated dose frame appears on the working monitor. C.34 X
If the equipment uses the Laser Localizer (optional): X X
- Switch it on.
- Check that it is centred on the I.I. tube. C.35 X X

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

If the equipment uses the printer (optional): X X


- Use the print command to get a printout of an image.
- Check the quality of the printed image. C.36 X X
If the equipment has the DICOM option: C.37 X
- Transfer an image and check that transmission is correct.

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.4 IMAGE QUALITY AND SYSTEM CHECKS

Below is a list of the steps needed to assess the state of the system. See the Annexes in this part of
the manual if there are any problems.

operations code

X-ray dose intensity D.1

Reference value: ATS has used an X-ray dose of 35 µR/s at 66 kV with 2 mm Cu filter.

Procedure: See Annex 2.1 in Part 3 of this manual.

Automatic X-ray dose control D.2

Reference value: Adjustment of the radiological parameters (kV and/or mA) must be fast,
progressive and repeatable.

Procedure: See Annex 2.2 in Part 3 of this manual.

Grey level D.3

Reference value: ATS has adopted the LEEDS test GS 2, following the instructions contained in the
paper "The Leeds Test Objects - 11/84".
All grey levels must be legible on the monitor.

Procedure: See Annex 2.3 in Part 3 of this manual.

Spatial resolution D.4

Reference value: ATS has used an 18" FUNK resolution test phantom. Check that the values
obtained during the test are close to those indicated in the Test Report
attached to the system.

Procedure: See Annex 2.4 in Part 3 of this manual.

Image uniformity D.5

Reference value: ATS has used a LEEDS test MS1, MS3 or MS4 phantom (according to the
instructions in the "The Leeds Test Objects - 11/84" publication).
The images must be uniform across their entire area.

Procedure: See Annex 2.5 in Part 3 of this manual.

Image distortion D.6

Reference value: ATS has used a "LEEDS test M1" phantom.


Check that distortion is less than 10%.

Procedure: See Annex 2.6 in Part 3 of this manual.

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Noise level D.7

Reference value: ATS has used a "LEEDS test N3" phantom, with 1 mm Cu filter.
ATS accepts noise levels that allow for "reading" of the targets with a minimum
contrast percentage of no more than 2%.

Procedure: See Annex 2.7 in Part 3 of this manual.

Min contrast D.8

Reference value: ATS has used a "Nuclear Associates mod. 07-645" phantom, with 2 mm Cu filter.
ATS accepts a minimum contrast percentage of no more than 3.5%.

Procedure: See Annex 2.8 in Part 3 of this manual.

Low contrast resolution with construction of the MTF curve D.9

Reference value: ATS has used a "LEEDS test TO 10" phantom. Check that the values obtained
during the test are close to those indicated in the Test Report attached to the
system.

Procedure: See Annex 2.9 in Part 3 of this manual.

I.I. tube conversion factor D.10

Reference value: A loss in the I.I. tube conversion factor causes a rise in the X-ray dose needed
to get the right video signal level.

The reference value for the X-ray dose is indicated in point D1 (X-ray dose
intensity) above.

Procedure: See Annex 2.10 in Part 3 of this manual.

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.5 TEST SHEET

The test sheet should be filled in by the user:


- during acceptance,
- during routine maintenance,
- after all extraordinary maintenance.

A "blank" copy of the acceptance test attached to this manual as one of the “loose pages”.
The various controls and checks are identified by an alphanumerical code, which refers to the
paragraphs above, listing the operations with a brief description.

Code Operation Notes Result


A.1 Equipment power supply cable and connector
A.2 Monitor unit / stand cable and connector
A.3 Monitor unit / stand sheath
A.4 Footswitch cable and connector
A.5 X-ray control button cable
B.1 C-arm sliding
B.2 C-arm sliding brake
B.3 C-arm rotation
B.4 C-arm rotation brake
B.5 Horizontal C-arm movement
B.6 Horizontal C-arm movement brake
B.7 C-arm angling (wig-wag)
B.8 C-arm angling brake
B.9 Column up/down movement
B.10 Smooth movement of stand wheels
B.11 Stand wheel parking brakes
B.12 ±90° rotation of rear stand wheels
B.13 Smooth movement of monitor unit wheels
B.14 Monitor unit wheel parking brakes
B.15 Fixing of monitors
B.16 Fixing of X-ray warning light
B.17 Fixing of panels on monitor unit
B.18 Fixing of panels on stand
B.19 State of monoblock cover
B.20 State of control panel on monitor unit
B.21 State of control panel on stand
B.22 State of on/off keys on stand
C.1 Keyboard + touchpad board **
C.2 Monitor unit power supply unit
C.3 Stand rack and boards
C.4 Monitor unit fans **
C.5 Stand switching on
C.6 UNNAMED image frame on monitor **
C.7 Study List frame **
C.8 Image frame with markers on monitor *
C.9 Automatic stand initializing test
C.10 Monoblock fans
C.11 Monitor unit safety button
C.12 Stand safety button
C.13 Stand column movement
C.14 X-ray warning light
C.15 Image on monitor

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

C.16 Continuous fluoroscopy indication on stand


C.17 Continuous fluoroscopy indication on monitor **
C.18 Correct dose
C.19 Collimator iris
C.20 Continuous fluoro to HD indication on stand **
C.21 Continuous fluoro to HD indication on monitor **
C.22 Pulsed fluoroscopy indication on stand
C.23 Pulsed fluoroscopy indication on monitor **
C.24 One shot indication on stand
C.25 One shot indication on monitor **
C.26 MAX OP / Road Mapping indications on stand **
C.27 MAX OP / Road Mapping indications on monitor **
C.28 Radiography time for 40 kV, 200 mAs Limits: 2.6 – 3.6 s
C.29 Radiography time for 80 kV, 130 mAs Limits: 3.1 – 4.3 s
C.30 Radiography time for 100 kV, 100 mAs Limits: 3.0 – 4.1 s
C.31 Collimator indications on monitor (optional) **
C.32 Image transfer to reference monitor **
C.33 Dose Area Meter on stand (optional)
C.34 Dose Area meter on monitor (optional)
C.35 Laser localizer centring (optional)
C.36 Video printer (optional)
C.37 DICOM options (optional) **
D.1 X-ray dose intensity
D.2 Automatic X-ray dose control
D.3 Grey scale
D.4 Spatial resolution
D.5 Image uniformity
D.6 Image distortion
D.7 Noise level
D.8 Min contrast
D.9 Low contrast resolution and MTF curve
D.10 I.I. tube conversion factor

* VIDEO MEMORY versions only

** VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only

revision 0 PART 3 page 1.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 01.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2 ANNEX: X-RAY DOSE CONTROL AND IMAGE QUALITY

2.1 X-RAY DOSE INTENSITY IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY

Reference value: ATS has used an X-ray dose value of 35 µR/s, under the following conditions.

Conditions: - Nominal I.I. field,


- X-ray beam filtering with a 2 mm copper filter on the collimator.
- X-ray dose measured on the front surface of the I.I. (under the grid).

Caution: If you measure the dose above the


grid, you must take into account the absorption
factor of the grid (see Test Report).

Procedure: - Set continuous fluoroscopy with automatic dose control.


- Give the X-ray emission command and wait for the control to stabilize.

VIDEO MEMORY - Make sure the measured dose is 35 µR/s (±10%)


version (SBFM)
VIDEO PROCESSOR - Make sure the measured dose is 35 µR/s (±10%)
version (DIP340)
- Make sure the video level is 2048 LSB (±10%) in the centre of the monitor.

Note: See para. 4.3.3.1 in Part 4 of this manual for details of the video level measuring
procedure.

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2 AUTOMATIC X-RAY DOSE CONTROL

Reference value: Adjustment of the radiological parameters (kV and/or mA) must be fast,
progressive and repeatable.

Conditions: - Nominal I.I. field,


- X-ray beam filtering with a 2 mm copper filter on the collimator.

Procedure: - Set continuous fluoroscopy with automatic dose control.


- Give the X-ray emission command and wait for the control to stabilise.

VIDEO MEMORY - Make sure the measured dose is 35 µR/s (±10%)


version (SBFM)
VIDEO PROCESSOR - Make the measured dose is 35 µR/s (±10%)
version (DIP340)
- Make sure the video level is 2048 LSB (±10%) in the centre of the monitor.

- Repeat for each I-I- tube zoom factor.

Note: See para. 4.3 in Part 4 of this manual for details of the automatic dose control procedure.

2.3 GREY SCALE

The grey scale is checked in all acquisition modes (continuous, pulsed and one-shot fluoroscopy), using
a LEEDS test GS2 phantom, with:

- 1 mm Cu filter on open collimator.


- LEEDS test GS2 phantom on the I.I. face.
- 9” I.I. tube field.
- Automatic X-ray dose control.

Procedure:

Acquire images in continuous fluoroscopy and check that all grey levels of the phantom are visible on
the monitor.

GS2
test object

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.4 SPATIAL RESOLUTION

Spatial resolution is measured in continuous, pulsed and one-shot fluoroscopy mode with:

- FUNK resolution test, type 18 (or equivalent) at 45° on the I.I. tube (as shown in the figure below).
- No X-ray beam filtering
- Automatic X-ray dose control.
- Recursive filter with weight k = 4.

Acquire images in all modes and read the line pair number on the monitor.

Resolution
test object

The table below shows the typical values (common for all modes: continuous fluoroscopy, pulsed
fluoroscopy, one shot).

• VERSIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera 625 lines:

FIELD 12” I.I. tube 9” I.I. tube


(zoom) LP/mm LP/mm
N 1.12 1.4
M1 1.4 1.8
M2 1.8 2.24

• VERSIONS 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera1k x 1k :

FIELD 12” I.I. tube 9” I.I. tube


(zoom) LP/mm LP/mm
N 1.6 2.0
M1 2.0 2.5
M2 2.5 3.15

Note: Check that the values are close to those indicated in the Test Report attached to the system.
If the max resolution is lower, check the focus (see para. 3.1 in Part 4 of this manual).

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.5 IMAGE UNIFORMITY

The uniformity of the image is checked by using LEEDS test MS1, MS3 and MS4 phantoms with:

- 9” I.I. field.
- No X-ray filtering.
- Automatic dose control.
- Recursive filter with weight k = 4.
- Leeds test MS1 / MS3 / MS4 phantoms on the face of the I.I. tube.

Acquire an image in continuous fluoroscopy and check that the image is uniform right across its area.

MS1
test object

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.6 IMAGE DISTORTION

Possible image distortion on the monitor is tested for in continuous fluoroscopy mode using a LEEDS test
M1 phantom, with:

- LEEDS test M1 phantom centred on the surface of the I.I. tube.


- 9” I.I. tube.
- Automatic X-ray dose control.

Procedure:

- Acquire images in continuous fluoroscopy mode.


- Find the diagonal measure of the central square (d) and the square with sides of 7 units on the monitor
(D1 and D2, see figure below).
- Calculate the geometric distortion of the image using this formula:

with

- Make sure that the resulting distortion is less than 10%.

D1 D2
M1
test object

9” I.I. field Distortion


Nominal field 3%

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.7 NOISE LEVEL

The noise level is checked in continuous fluoroscopy mode using the LEEDS test N3 phantom.
[This test is based on the use of a phantom with 19 circular targets having the same diameter but
different contrast: the lowest contrast target visible indicates the actual noise level.]

Measuring conditions:

- LEEDS test N3 phantom on the centre of the surface of the I.I. tube.
- 9” I.I. field.
- Automatic X-ray dose control.
- 1 mm Cu filter on the X-ray collimator.
- Recursive filter with weight k = 4.

Procedure:

- Acquire images in continuous fluoroscopy mode.


- Find the number of visible targets on the monitor.

N3
test object

The table below shows the acceptable limits for the system.

• VERSIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera 625 lines:

N° details
9” field 15

• VERSIONS 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera1k x 1k :

N° targets
9” field 15

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.8 MINIMUM CONTRAST

The min contrast is measured in continuous fluoroscopy mode using the Nuclear Associates test, model
07-645.
[This test involves the use of 2 phantoms (“A” and “B”), with 9 round targets of differing contrast levels
on each of these; the contrast levels of the targets on phantom “B” are in-between those of
phantom “A”.]

Measuring conditions:

- Phantom A or B on the face of the I.I. tube, centred.


- 9”. I.I. field
- Automatic X-ray dose control.
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray collimator.
- Recursive filter with weight k = 4.

Procedure:

- In continuous fluoroscopy:
- acquire images using test phantom A and find the target with the lowest level of contrast
on the monitor and make a note of its identifying number.
Make a note of the working kV;

- acquire images using test phantom B and find the target with the lowest level of contrast
on the monitor and make a note of its identifying number.
Make a note of the working kV;

- Using the lowest of the 2 numbers, use the table below and the working kV to find the
corresponding percentage of min visible contrast.

Note 1: The phantoms are marked with the letters A and B; marks 1 and 3 are needed to position
the phantom in order to number the targets (the numbering system is indicated in figures Q9a
and Q9b below).

1 3 1 3
2 1.5
7 9 6.5 8.5

5 4.5
4 6 3.5 5.5

8 7.5
1 3 0.5 2.5

A B

Fig. Q9a Fig. Q9b

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Percent Contrast [%]


Hole number
per 60 kV per 70 kV
0.5 0.66 0.56
1 1.31 1.11
1.5 1.97 1.67
2 2.62 2.23
2.5 3.28 2.79
3 3.94 3.34
3.5 4.59 3.90
4 5.25 4.46
4.5 5.9 5.01
5 6.56 5.57

Note 2: - Under test conditions, the system normally selects 66 kV; we have, therefore, only provided the
portion of the table for 60 kV and 70 kV. Interpolate the figures to get the intermediate values.

The table below shows the acceptable limits for the system.

• VERSIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera 625 lines:

Percent Contrast
9” field 2.9%

• VERSIONS 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera1k x 1k :

Percent Contrast
9” field 2.9%

- ATS considers minimum contrast sensitivity values of not more than 3.5% to be acceptable.

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.9 LOW CONTRAST RESOLUTION AND MTF CURVE

The low contrast resolution and the construction of the MTF curve (modulation transfer) are tested in
continuous fluoroscopy mode using a LEEDS test TO10 phantom.

Measuring conditions:

- TO10 phantom on centre of the I.I. tube face.


- 9” I.I. field.
- Automatic X-ray dose control.
- 1 mm Cu filter on X-ray collimator.
- Recursive filter with weight k = 4.

Procedure:

- Acquire images in continuous fluoroscopy mode and find the number of visible details on the monitor
(each series is indicated by different letters with 9 details).

E
F

A G
Note: The figure here shows the form of the H
J
phantom. B
C
K
L
TO 10 M
test object

• VERSIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera 625 lines):

Visible details
Series of details (typical values)
Nominal field
A 7
B 7
C 7
D 8
E 7
F 6
G 7
H 6
J 6
K 5
L 3
M 1

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

• VERSIONS 5, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - TV camera 1k x 1k:

Visible details
Series of details (typical values)
Nominal field
A 8
B 8
C 7
D 8
E 7
F 6
G 7
H 6
J 6
K 6
L 4
M 3

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.10 I.I. TUBE CONVERSION FACTOR

On a regular basis, at least once every 12 months, you need to check and, if necessary, compensate
for the loss of the I.I. tube conversion factor (response).

Reference value: ATS has used an X-ray dose value of 35 µR/s, under the following conditions:

Conditions: - Normal I.I. field, normal dose.


- X-ray beam filtering with a 2 mm Cu filter on the collimator.
- X-ray dose measured at the front surface of the I.I. (under the grid).

Warning: if this test is carried out by measuring the dose on top of the grid, you
must take into account the absorption factor of the grid (see Test
Report).

Procedure:
- Compare the current dose value with those in previous tests.
- Assess the loss in the tube conversion factor on the basis of the increase in the dose.

This check is important to allow the system to adjust the X-ray dose automatically to suit the reading of
the I.I. tube light output: thus the loss of the I.I. tube conversion factor leads to an increase in the X-ray
dose.

The loss of the conversion factor can be compensated for, where possible, in three ways:

1 Increasing, where possible, the opening of the iris. Then:

2 Increasing the video gain of the TV Camera.


This will, however, lead to an increase in the electrical disturbance of the TV Camera and so
should only be used as long as the image remains acceptable.

3 Increasing (if necessary) the X-ray dose to the local legal limits.

When the above operations fail to have the required effect, replace the I.I. tube.

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.11 DOSE AREA METER EFFICIENCY TEST

The performance test for the Dose Area meter (DAM) involves comparing the value of the dose per
surface on the working monitor (mGy*cm2) with that calculated by reading a dosimeter.

- Place a dosimeter on the cover of the monoblock, with the collimators fully open, having a
sensitive area wider than the complete X-ray beam at that point.
The diameter of the X-ray beam at the monoblock cover should be approximately:
- 7 cm for the 9” I.I. tube,
- 8 cm for the 12” I.I. tube.
- Set the reference dosimeter for mGy.
- Select manual continuous fluoroscopy at 60 kV.
- Clear the dosimeter and reset the dose indication.
- Give the fluoroscopy command for about 10 seconds and then note the reading on the dosimeter.
- Multiply the dosimeter reading (mGy) by the value of the nominal sensitive area of the dosimeter
(in m2).
- Check that the difference between the calculated “dose*area” value and that shown on the
control panel display is not greater than 20%.

Example: - dosimeter sensitive area: 100 cm2 = 0.01m2


- reading on dosimeter: 8.93 mGy
- calculated dose*area: 8.93 mGy * 1000* 0,01m2 = 89.3 µGy*m2
- reading on monitor: 98 µGy*m2
- error %: (98 – 89.3) / 89.3 * 100 = 9.7%.

Contact the Technical Service if the error is more than 20%.

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.12 CHECKING THE KERMA AND KERMA RATIO INDICATIONS

The Reference Air Kerma and the Reference Air Kerma Rate values shown by the EM equipment are
automatically calculated on the basis of the set kV and mA. These values are used to define the patient
input reference point.
The Reference Air Kerma and the Reference Air Kerma Rate values cannot be adjusted.

THE PATIENT INPUT REFERENCE POINT is found along the X-ray beam, 30cm from the I.I.
tube under the measuring conditions specified by the standard EN 60601-2-54 (para.
203.6.3.102)

Standard EN 60601-2-54 (203.5.2.4.5.101 c) foresees a 50% tolerance in the values


shown.

For details of the min and max Reference Air Kerma Rates for each acquisition mode, see:
- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. Dose metering information.

revision 0 PART 3 page 2.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S3 02
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Part 4 : ADJUSTMENTS

CONTENTS

Pages rev. date

CONTENTS I-1 to I-2 0 01/06/12

1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1 0 01/06/12


1.1 Introduction

2 X-RAY ADJUSTMENTS 2.1 to 2.13 0 01/06/12


2.1 Introduction
2.2 Adjusting the kV and mA
2.2.1 Adjusting the “Set kV”
2.2.2 Adjusting the filament current
2.2.2.1 Preliminary adjustments
2.2.2.2 Adjusting the filament current
2.2.3 Checking the kV and mA
2.3 Adjusting the X-ray collimator

3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS 3.1 to 3.8 0 01/06/12


3.1 Focussing the TV camera
3.2 Centring the TV camera
3.2.1 Mechanical centring
3.2.2 Electronic correction for versions with SBFM video
memory
3.2.3 Electronic correction for versions with DIP340 video
processor
3.3 Centring the X-ray collimator
3.3.1 Centring the flat-plate shutters
3.3.2 Centring the iris
3.4 Adjusting the column up/down movement

4 VIDEO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENTS 4.1 to 4.25 0 01/06/12


4.1 Introduction
4.2 Video adjustments for versions 1, 2 (Video Memory)
4.2.1 Pre-settings
4.2.2 Adjusting the iris
4.2.3 Adjusting the TV camera (625 lines)
4.2.4 Adjusting the reading area for auto. dose control
4.2.5 Adjusting the video signal
4.2.6 Automatic X-ray dose control
4.2.6.1 Setting the reference dose
4.3 Video adjustments for versions 3, 4, 5(Video Processor)
4.3.1 Pre-settings
4.3.2 Adjusting the iris
4.3.2.1 Pixel View Manager
4.3.3 Adjusting the TV camera (625 lines) - DIP340MR
versions

revision 0 PART 4 page I - 1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.4 Adjusting the TV camera (1kx1k) - DIP340HR


versions
4.3.4.1 Test mode
4.3.4.2 TV camera setup
4.3.5 Adjusting the reading area for auto. dose control
4.3.6 Automatic X-ray dose control
4.3.6.1 Setting the reference dose
4.4 Video adjustments for version 6
4.4.1 Pre-settings
4.4.2 Adjusting the TV camera
4.4.2.1 Test mode
4.4.2.2 TV camera setup
4.4.3 Adjusting the auto. dose control reading area
4.4.4 X-ray dose and iris adjustments
4.4.4.1 Continuous fluoroscopy
4.4.4.2 Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy
4.4.4.3 Pixel View Manager
4.5 Adjusting the monitors (Video Processor versions only)
4.5.1 Adjusting the monitor brightness and contrast
5 ANNEXES 5.1 to 5.17 0 01/06/12
5.1 Potentiometer list
5.2 LED list
5.3 Fuse list
5.4 Main power supply at 120V
5.4.1 Adjusting the kV and mA
5.4.1.1 Adjusting the kV settings
5.4.1.2 Adjusting the filament current
5.4.1.3 Preliminary adjustments
5.4.1.4 Adjusting the filament current
5.4.2 Checking the kV and mA

revision 0 PART 4 page I - 2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 00
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This equipment is fully adjusted in the factory and so only needs to be installed and checked.
The information given in this section of the manual is needed to adjust the equipment during
maintenance.

The following abbreviations will be used, where possible, in this manual for the boards:

TV Camera CD100ca board (625lines): CCDH board = CCD-B1

TV Camera CD1030ca board (1k x 1k): CD1030ca board = CD1030ca

SBFM76 memory boards: SBFM07 board = M7


SBFM06 board = M6

Monitor unit board: ASPS 00 board = B20

I.R. remote control boards IRR 00 board = B21


IRT 00 board = B22

Stand boards: RkMC 00 board = B1


µP376 board = B2
RkFS 00 board = B3
ASAC 01 board = B4
ASSR 00 board = B5
RkCO 00 board = B6
RkCA 00 board = B7
RkOO 00 board = B8
RkUD 00 board = B9

There are basically three areas of adjustment:

- CHAP. 2 X-ray adjustments, including:


kV and mA adjustments.
X-ray collimator adjustments.

- CHAP. 3 Mechanical and electrical adjustments, including:


TV camera focussing.
TV camera centring.
X-ray collimator centring.
Column up/down movement adjustments.

- CHAP. 4 Video signal adjustments, including:


TV camera adjustments.
X-ray dose and iris adjustments.
Monitor adjustments.

revision 0 PART 4 page 1.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 01.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2 X-RAY ADJUSTMENTS

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Access the adjustments menu using the Setup 3 menu on the console touch screen (SET KV, I-FIL and RX
COLLIMATOR) as explained in para. 4.1 of Part 2 above.

This menu has two pages:

PAGE 1: PAGE 2:

The table below lists the possible adjustments in Set-Up 3 and the accepted ranges for each parameter:

SETUP 3 - Page 1
FUNCTION VALUE
minimum TYPICAL maximum
REAL SET kV detected by the equipment
SET KV SET 40 kV 450 506 550
SET 120 kV 1500 1540 1600
0.2 mA (40 kV) 200 382 500
I-FIL 1 Contin. fluoroscopy
5 mA (70kV) 300 476 600
65 mA (40kV) 400 618 800
I-FIL 2 Standard radiogr.
28 mA (100kV) 350 564 750
SET I-FIL
100 mA (40kV) 450 644 750
I-FIL 3 High power radiogr.
40 mA (100kV) 400 580 700
1.6 mA (40kV) 350 442 600
I-FIL 4 HCF (optional)
40 mA (70kV) 450 568 700

SETUP 3 - Page 2
FUNCTION VALUE
minimum TYPICAL maximum
IRIS REAL Iris aperture detected
IRIS MIN 15 35 50
ZOOM 2 "iris min" 110 255
IRIS
ZOOM 1 "zoom 2" 145 255
RX NORMAL "zoom1" 195 255
COLLIMATOR FILM RAD "normal" 205 255
SHUT REAL Shutter aperture detected
SHUT MAX 80 185 255
SHUTTER
SHUT ANG. -90 0 +90
SHUT ORIENT. 0 1 1

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2 ADJUSTING THE kV AND mA

Follow the procedure for adjusting the radiological


parameters using the functions in page 1 of SETUP 3:

• Adjusting the set kV.

• Adjusting the filament current in:


- Continuous fluoroscopy (I-FIL 1)
- Radiography:
- standard (I-FIL 2)
- high power (I-FIL 3)
- Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (I-FIL 4, optional).

• Checking the kV applied to the X-ray tube.

• Checking the anode mA.

You must enter the technical password to access these stages in the setup procedure: “2006”.

Note1: Press the encoder dial twice to confirm the new settings and quit the Setup procedure: the first
time you press this, you confirm the parameter settings; the second time, you close the setup
menu.

Note 2: See the Annex in para. 5.4 of this part of the menu if the EM equipment uses 120 V AC.

Attention

The procedure requires that the voltage is measured at the points shown below:

- To measure the SET kV: connect an oscilloscope or digital voltmeter (DC) between CP1-10 (+)
and Tp5 (-) on inverter board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 20kV.

- To measure the real kV connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on inverter
board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 20kV.

- To measure the anode mA in fluoroscopy connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp2 (+) and
Tp5 (-) on inverter board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 1mA.

- To measure the anode mA in radiography connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp4 (+) and
Tp5 (-) on board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 10 mA.

- To measure the anode mA in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (optional), connect an oscilloscope (DC)
on board PSM05.
- mA<10 between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-). The format is 1V = 1 mA.
- mA>10 between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-). The format is 1V = 10 mA.

- To measure the SET filament voltage connect an oscilloscope or digital voltmeter (DC) between
Tp13 (+) and Tp8 (-) on board B3.
The format is 1V ≅ 100mA (filament).

- To measure the Filament current (Ifilament) connect a TRUE RMS reading ammeter in the place of
jumper B3 - CM3: 1-3 (scale limit: ≥1A AC).

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

This table summarises the above measuring points:

Measuring points
SET kV PSM05: CP1-10, Tp5
real kV PSM05: Tp3, Tp5
mA continuous fluoro / pulsed HCF fluoro for i<10 mA PSM05: Tp2, Tp5
mA radiography / pulsed HCF fluoro for i>10 mA PSM05: Tp4, Tp5
SET I-FIL B3: Tp13, Tp8
IFilament B3 - CM3: 1-3

BOARD PSM05

BOARD B3
(RkFS 00)

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2.1 ADJUSTING THE SET kV

a) ADJUSTING THE MAX SAFE kV FOR THE INVERTER

- Check the position of jumpers J2A and J2B (2-3) on board PSM05: this sets the max safe value for the
inverter at 120 kV.

b) ADJUSTING THE SET kV

• Connect a digital voltmeter (DC) to inverter board PSM05 between CP1-10(+) and Tp5(-);

• Select field: SET 40 kV


- adjust the parameter to get a reading of: 2.00 V
- check the setting in the REAL kV field: 40kV±1kV.

• Select field: SET 120 kV


- adjust the parameter to get a reading of: 6.00 V
- check the setting in the REAL kV field: 120kV±1kV.

c) CHECKING THE ADJUSTMENT

• Confirm the new parameter setting and quit the Setup procedure (press twice on the encoder).
Select all the intermediate kV values in the FLUOROSCOPY frame and check that the voltage
shown on the voltmeter is: V=kVset/20 ± 25mV
(e.g.: at 100 kV you should get V = 5 V ± 25 mV).

The “SET kV ERROR” appears if the REAL kV value differs from the set value by more than ±6 kV
during X-ray emission.

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2.2 ADJUSTING THE FILAMENT CURRENT

There are two stages to this:

a) Preliminary adjustments, only needed if board B3 needs to be fully adjusted.

b) Adjustment of the filament current in the envisaged working modes to get the required anode mA
values.

The table below shows, in steps of 10 kV, the values for the anode mA associated to the typical kV and
the filament current* (detected on a test monoblock).

* Note: By filament current we mean the current in the primary circuit in the filament transformer.

VERSIONS 1, 3, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter) -fixed anode X-ray tube


I-FIL 2 I-FIL 3
I-FIL 1
standard radiogr. high power radiogr.
SET kV kV continuous fluoro.
( > 5mAs) ( < = 5mAs)
mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament

[V] [kV] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA]


2 40 0.20 220 65.0 402 100.0 421
2.5 50 0.60 247 56.0 392 80.0 408
3 60 2.80 283 46.6 380 66.6 394
3.5 70 5.00 298 40.0 372 57.1 387
4 80 4.68 294 35.0 366 50.0 382
4.5 90 4.16 291 31.1 361 44.4 373
5 100 3.75 289 28.0 357 40.0 369
5.5 110 3.40 285 25.4 353 36.3 364
6 120 3.12 282 23.3 349 33.3 361

VERSIONS 2, 4, 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - rotating anode X-ray tube


I-FIL 2 I-FIL 3 I-FIL 4
I-FIL 1
standard radiogr. high power radiogr. pulsed HCF fluoro.
SET kV kV continuous fluoro.
( > 5mAs) ( < = 5mAs) (optional)
mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament

[V] [kV] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA]
2 40 0.2 206 65.0 368 100.0 386 1.6 278
2.5 50 0.6 228 56.0 359 80.0 373 4.8 301
3 60 2.8 262 46.6 351 66.6 363 22.4 337
3.5 70 5.0 275 40.0 344 57.1 356 40.0 353
4 80 4.6 273 35.0 338 50.0 349 37.4 350
4.5 90 4.1 269 31.1 333 44.4 345 33.2 345
5 100 3.7 267 28.0 328 40.0 340 30.0 342
5.5 110 3.4 264 25.4 325 36.3 336 27.2 339
6 120 3.1 262 23.3 322 33.3 333 24.9 337

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2.1.1 PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS

• Switch the equipment off.


• Connect an ammeter (with "true RMS" reading, scale ≥1 A) in the place of jumper B3-CM3 to
measure the filament current.
• Place jumper B3-JP1 at 1-2 (manual set filament).

1. Adjusting the mA reading


• Connect a digital voltmeter between B3-Tp13(+) and B3-Tp8 (-).
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V DC.
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P3 to get the max filament current.
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P1 to get a filament current of 300 mA.

2. Checking the max safe current of the small filament (fluoroscopy)


• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Check the safety of the max current by gradually increasing the filament current via
potentiometer B3-P2 until the safety device trips (typically Ifilament ≅ 410 mA).
LED B3-LD5 should light up.

Attention: The safety device stops the equipment. Switch off and reboot to continue working.

• Readjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V at Tp13.

3. Checking the max safe current of the large filament (radiography)


• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Check the safety of the max current by gradually increasing the filament current via
potentiometer B3-P2 until the safety device trips (typically Ifilament ≅ 510 mA).
LED B3-LD5 should light up.

Attention: The safety device stops the equipment. Switch off and reboot to continue working.

• Readjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V at Tp13.


• Return jumper B3-JP1 to 2-3 (automatic set filament).

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2.1.2 ADJUSTING THE FILAMENT CURRENT

• Connect an oscilloscope (DC) to inverter board PSM05 between:


Tp2 (+ mA fluoroscopy) o Tp4 (+ mA radiography) and Tp5 (-).

1. Adjusting the Filament Current in continuous fluoroscopy mode (I-FIL 1)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-0.2mA.


• Give the X-ray command in continuous fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
0.2V (±5%) at Tp2, corresponding to 0.2mA (1V = 1mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
0.2 mA (±0.1mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 70kV-5mA.


• Give the X-ray command in continuous fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
5.0V (±5%) at Tp2, corresponding to 5.0mA (1V = 1mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
5.0 mA (±0.2mA).

2. Adjusting the Filament Current in standard radiography mode (I-FIL 2)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-65mA.


• Set 10mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in standard radiography and adjust the parameter to get
6.5V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 65mA (1V = 10mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 100kV-28mA.


• Set 10mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in standard radiography and adjust the parameter to get
2.8V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 28mA (1V = 10mA).

3. Adjusting the Filament Current in high power radiography (I-FIL 3)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-100mA.


• Set 5mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in radiography and adjust the parameter to get 10.0V (±5%)
at Tp4, corresponding to 100mA (1V = 10mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 100kV-40mA.


• Set 5mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in radiography and adjust the parameter to get 4.V (±5%)
at Tp4, corresponding to 40mA (1V = 10mA).

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4. Adjusting the Filament Current in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (I-FIL 4) – version 6 only:

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-1.6mA.


• Give the X-ray command in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
pulsed 0.16V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 1.6mA (1V = 10mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
1.6 mA (±0.1mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 70kV-40mA.


• Give the X-ray command in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
pulsed 4.0V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 40mA (1V = 10mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
40 mA (±0.2mA).

2.2.3 CHECKING THE kV AND mA

After adjusting the mA, you need to check the kV value (i.e. the real kV) and the inverter mA.
The precision tolerances foreseen by standard EN 60601-2-7 are ±5% for the kV and ±10% for the mA.
If the kV is not correct, repeat the above adjustments.

a) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01a.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS
kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.20 0.18 - 0.22
70 66.5 - 73.5 5.00 4.50 - 5.50
120 114 - 126 3.12 2.81 - 3.43

Fig. 01a: kV e mA in scopia continua a 70kV

Fig. 01a: kV and mA in continuous fluoroscopy at 70kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

b) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN ONE-SHOT FLUOROSCOPY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select manual one-shot fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01b.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS WITH FIXED ANODE


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.40 0.36 - 0.44
70 66.5 - 73.5 10.00 9.00 - 11.00
120 114 - 126 6.24 5.61 - 6.86

ALL VERSIONS WITH ROTATING ANODE


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.48 0.43 - 0.52
70 66.5 - 73.5 12.00 10.80 - 13.20
120 114 - 126 7.49 6.74 - 8.23

Fig. 01b: kV and mA in one-shot fluoroscopy (rotating anode) at 70kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

c) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN STANDARD RADIOGRAPHY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select radiography.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Set 10 mAs.
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01c.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS
kV mA

set accepted range theoretical accepted range


on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 65.0 58.5 - 71.5
70 66.5 - 73.5 40.0 36.0 - 44.0
120 114 - 126 23.3 20.9 - 25.6

Fig. 01c: kV and mA in standard radiography at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

d) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN HIGH POWER RADIOGRAPHY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select radiography.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Set 5 mAs.
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01d.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS
kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 100.0 90.0 - 110.0
70 66.5 - 73.5 57.1 51.3 - 62.8
120 114 - 126 33.3 29.9 - 36.6

Fig. 01d: kV and mA in high power radiography at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

e) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY (version 6)

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select pulsed fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01e.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

DIP340HR - WITH HCF ONLY


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 1.60 1.44 - 1.76
70 66.5 - 73.5 40.0 36.0 - 44.0
120 114 - 126 24.9 22.4 - 27.3

Fig. 01e: kV and mA in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.3 ADJUSTING THE X-RAY COLLIMATOR

Use the functions on page 2 of the SETUP 3 menu on the


control panel to adjust the X-ray collimator.
These functions let you set the following parameters:
- min iris aperture
- max iris aperture for each I.I. tube
zoom factor and for cassette
radiography
- max aperture of the parallel plates
- correction of the angle of the parallel plates
on the monitor

Access the Setup procedure by entering the technical password: “2006”.

• Select field: IRIS MIN


• Set 10.
• Read the iris aperture value in field IRIS REAL (e.g.: 35).
• Set the IRIS MIN value as that read.

• Select field: IRIS ZOOM 2


• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at 40kV and adjust the parameter so that the
iris is just visible inside the electronic circle on the monitor.

• Select field: IRIS ZOOM 1


• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at 40kV and adjust the parameter so that the
iris is just visible inside the electronic circle on the monitor.

• Select field: IRIS NORMAL


• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at 40kV and adjust the parameter so that the
iris is just visible inside the electronic circle on the monitor.

• Select field: IRIS FILM RAD


• Depending on the I.I. tube, set the parameter as follows:
- IRIS NORMAL + 10 points (9” I.I. tube)
- IRIS ZOOM 1 + 10 points (12” I.I. tube)

• Select field: SHUT MAX


• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at 40kV and adjust the parameter so that the
parallel plates are just visible inside the electronic circle on the monitor.

• Select field: SHUT ANG. (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only).


• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at 40kV and close the parallel plates so that
they are fully visible on the monitor. Without X-ray emission, adjust the parameter so that the angle
of the virtual indication of the parallel plates matches the real value on the monitor.

• Select field: SHUT ORIENT. (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only).


• Set either SHUT ORIENT = 1 or SHUT ORIENT = 0 to suit the default image flip setting in the General
Settings of the DIP340 video processor (H-Flip or V-Flip, see para. 5.2 in Part 2)
• Give the continuous fluoroscopy command and check that the virtual indication of the plates on
the monitor turns in the same direction as the real plates.

• Quit the Set-Up procedure.


Important: the adjustment of the max aperture for each I.I. tube zoom factor must be adjusted
so that the edge of the collimator is still visible: this guarantees correct collimation of the X-ray
beam.

revision 0 PART 4 page 2.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 02
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3.1 FOCUSSING THE TV CAMERA

Measuring conditions: - I.I. tube on smallest field.


- Resolution phantom on the input face of the I.I. tube, at 45°.
- Select manual fluoroscopy, setting the kV to get a correct image (40 - 44 kV).
- VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only: select filter EDGE=SHARP.

With reference to figures 1 and 2:

• Remove the panel covering the I.I. unit (see para. 5.1.2 in Part 5 of this manual).
• Loosen focussing ring nut (G) marked FOCUS.
• Give the X-ray command.
• Using a suitable pin or small screwdriver in one of focussing holes (F), turn the focussing ring nut to get
the maximum resolution of the image in the smallest field on the monitor.
• Close the ring nut (G) to fix the position of the focus.

Fig. 1
CD100ca TV camera

Fig. 2
CD1030ca TV camera

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.2 CENTRING THE TV CAMERA

To centre the TV Camera correctly:


- place a suitable reference object (e.g. a washer or disk) in the centre of the leading edge of the
I.I. tube;
- VIDEO MEMORY versions: enable the display of the centring cross on the working monitor by
pressing the relevant button enabled in the Setup menu.

Adjustment is correct when:


- during full 360° rotation, the image on the monitor is always centred on the rotation axis,
- the image is still centred after using the horizontal flip command.

The drawings below show correct and incorrect centring.

Monitor
Acquisition matrix
Image

Correctly centred Incorrectly centred

Fig. 3

The TV camera is centred in two stages:


- PHASE 1: mechanical centring (see para. 3.2.1).
- PHASE 2: electronic correction:
- VIDEO MEMORY versions (see para. 3.2.2).
- VIDEO PROCESSOR versions (see para. 3.2.3).

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.2.1 MECHANICAL CENTRING

Measuring conditions: - Normal I.I. field.


- Select manual fluoroscopy at 40 kV.

• Remove the panel covering the I.I. unit (see para. 5.1.2 in Part 5 of this manual).
- Make sure the horizontal flip function is disabled.
- Place a suitable reference object (e.g. a washer or disk) in the centre of the leading edge of the I.I.
tube.
- Give the fluoroscopy command and check the centring on the monitor.

If not correctly centred:

• Loosen the 3 screws (V) (fig.4) fixing the “TV camera + lens” unit to the I.I. tube plate.
• Give the X-ray emission command and mechanically centre the camera in small steps until the
image of the reference object sits on top of the centre of the electronic circle (or centring cross).
• Fix the lens by tightening the 3 screws (V).

Fig. 4

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.2.2 ELECTRONIC CORRECTION FOR VERSIONS WITH VIDEO MEMORY

If the mechanical centring is not perfect, you can make a small electronic adjustment using rotary
switch SW1 on board SBFM07 (see fig. 5): this gradually moves the image sideways.

SW1

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

3.2.3 ELECTRONIC CORRECTION FOR VERSIONS WITH VIDEO PROCESSOR

If the mechanical centring is not perfect, you can make a small electronic adjustment by adjusting the
Pan and Scroll parameters in the Setup menu - SETUP / HARDWARE SETTINGS / CCD CAMERA (see para.
5.3.10 in Part 2 of this manual):

Fig. 6

- Pan [ -8 ... +7 ] : horizontal shifting of the image

- Scroll [ -8 ... +7 ] : vertical shifting of the image

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.3 CENTRING THE X-RAY COLLIMATOR

The collimator consists of 2 distinct units:


- shutter (thin-plate) collimator,
- iris collimator.

To centre the collimator you need to adjust the position of these two items.
We recommend adjusting first the shutters and then the iris.

X- ray emission is required to check the adjustments.


Wear suitable protection and keep at a safe distance when checking the adjustments.

3.3.1 CENTRING THE SHUTTERS

Check the image of the shutters on the monitor:

// //
Shutter area

Incorrectly centred Correctly centred


Fig. 7

• Position the C-arm so that the X-ray axis is vertical and the monoblock is lowered.
• Remove the front cover on the monoblock (see paragraph 5.1.1 in Part 5).
• Remove the collimator cover (see paragraph 5.2.2.1 in Part 5).
• Select manual fluoroscopy, and set 40 kV.
• Select the nominal I.I. field.
• Give the command to open the iris completely.
• With X-ray emission, give the command to rotate the shutters until these are vertical and then adjust
their aperture so that the image on the monitor is about 2 cm from the edge of the electronic circle.
• If the image is asymmetrical, loosen the 3 bolts “A” (Fig. 8a and 8b) used to centre the shutters and
move the unit until the image is symmetrical.
• After centring the shutters vertically, rotate them horizontally, give the X-ray emission command and
check their position on the image.
• If you need to correct the centring: gradually move the shutter unit to get the best compromise
between its vertical and horizontal positions.
• Secure the shutter unit in position by tightening the 3 bolts “A”.

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

A
Shutter unit

Fig. 8a

Fig. 8b

Note: The figures above show the X-ray collimator without its cover and the supports used for the dose
meter.
The above instructions are still valid even when the dose meter is fitted.

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.3.2 CENTRING THE IRIS

Check the image of the iris on the monitor, after centring the shutters.

Correctly centred Incorrectly centred

Fig. 9
With the same measuring conditions as above (centring the shutters):

• Open the shutters completely,


• Give the X-ray command and then gradually open the iris until it is just visible inside the electronic
circle.
• Use the 3 screws "B" (Fig. 10) that fix the iris unit and adjust as necessary until the iris is centred on the
monitor.
• Once correctly centred, fix the position of the iris unit by tightening the 3 bolts “B".

Iris unit

B Fig. 10

Note: The figures above show the X-ray collimator without its cover and the supports used for the dose
meter.
The above instructions are still valid even when the dose meter is fitted.

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3.4 ADJUSTING THE COLUMN UP/DOWN MOVEMENT

You need to adjust the speed at which the stand column moves up and down and set the max current
for the motor.

These adjustments are done using the 3 potentiometers on board B4 (ASAC).


If this board needs to be replaced, you must check the following adjustments:

Potentiometer Name Function


P1 UP SPEED Used to adjust the up speed
P3 DOWN SPEED Used to adjust the down speed
P2 CURRENT LIMITATION Used to adjust the max current for the motor

• Start by adjusting:
- potentiometer P2 (CURRENT LIMITATION) by turning it fully clockwise to disable current
limitation,
- potentiometers P1 (UP SPEED) and P3 (DOWN SPEED) fully clockwise (min speed).

• Then adjust potentiometer P1 to get a column up speed of about 1 cm/s (column takes at least 45
seconds to rise completely).

• Adjust potentiometer P3 to get a column down speed of about 1 cm/s (column takes at least 45
seconds to rise completely).

You must set the max current for the motor (and thus the max force of the motor) at the min value
needed to get the column to rise and so that guarantee safe movement in the event of accidental
collisions between the column and other objects.

• With the longitudinal slide of the arc fully forwards, adjust P2 to the min current value that allows the
system to complete the up movement smoothly and without stopping.

Note: Motor absorption increases as the column approaches the top limit stop.
Typical motor current values:
- up: max 5 A
- down: max 1 A

P1 P3 P2

Fig. 11
board B4

revision 0 PART 4 page 3.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4 VIDEO SIGNAL ADJUSTMENTS

4.1 INTRODUCTION

Definitions:

Mean grey level: the signal level leaving the CCD detector, obtained using the nominal
X-ray dose on the face of the I.I. tube and a homogeneous filter.

Dynamic range: the ratio between the mean grey level and the max level supplied by
the CCD detector. The adjustment procedure described in this manual
foresees using a dynamic range of 1:3 (γ = 0.6).

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.2 VIDEO ADJUSTMENTS FOR VERSIONS 1, 2 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - Video Memory

4.2.1 PRESETTINGS
X-Ray
TUBE ASSEMBLY
Measuring conditions:
- Nominal I.I. field.
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray beam.
- Collimator fully open.
- Remove the grid on the I.I. tube and place the Filter
(2 mm Cu)
detector probe (dosimeter) on the leading edge of
the I.I. (see figure 1 on the right).
- Select manual fluoroscopy. Grid
- Set the kV to get an X-ray dose of 35 µR/s.

Dosimeter

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Fig. 1

4.2.2 ADJUSTING THE IRIS

Measuring conditions: See para. 4.2.1 above.

• Connect an oscilloscope at TP10 and set 0V at TP7 on board CCD-Board (see figure 4).

With reference to figure 2:

• Loosen grub screw "F" (marked IRIS) to rotate iris adjustment shaft “G”.
• Give the X-ray command at the correct dose.
• Use a pin or small screwdriver to turn shaft “G” until you get a reading of 250 mV on the oscilloscope.
• Tighten grub screw "F" to fix the position of the iris.

F G (iris adjustment)

Fig. 2

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.2.3 ADJUSTING THE TV CAMERA

The CD100ca TV camera is pre-set in the factory. You may, however, need to adjust this again if the I.I.
tube or the lens unit has been replaced. Adjustment may also become necessary after correcting a loss
in the I.I. tube conversion factor.

Measuring conditions: See para. 4.2.1 above.

• Move the oscilloscope to TP5 (CCD-Board).

• Command manual fluoroscopy.

• Adjust potentiometer P3 (VIDEO GAIN) on CCD-


Board to get a video signal reading of 230 mV on the
oscilloscope.

Fig. 3

TP7

P3 (Video Gain)

TP10

TP5

Fig. 4
CCD board

4.2.4 ADJUSTING THE READING AREA FOR AUTOMATIC DOSE CONTROL

The video signal reading area needs to be adjusted for correct automatic X-ray dose control.

• Set the reading area size you want using jumpers JP9 JP9 JP10 Reading area size
and JP10 on board SBFM07 as shown in the table on OFF OFF Max = 117 mm (c.)
the right: OFF ON Large = 102 mm (c.)
ON OFF Small = 93 mm (c.)
ON ON Min = 84 mm (c.)

Note 1: Press the centring cross enabling button in setup mode to view the reading area.
Note 2: The equipment is supplied with the reading area at the min setting (JP9, JP10= ON).

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.2.5 ADJUSTING THE VIDEO SIGNAL

Measuring conditions: Oscilloscope with probe (A) on TP5 (board CCD-B1) and probe (B) on M7-J3-3 (0V
at M7-J3-1) (see figures 4 and 7).

ADC adjustments:
• Without giving the X-ray command, adjust M7-PT2 (fig. 7) (BLANK LEVEL) to get a video signal with
blanking level 0 mV at M7-J3-3.
• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command and adjust the kV to get a signal of 700 mV at
TP5 (board CCD-B1) and then adjust M7-PT1 (GAIN) to get a signal of 2.8 V (MAX PEAK) at M7-J3-3.
• Save an image and then release the X-ray command.

DAC adjustments:
• Move probe B on the oscilloscope to M6-TP1-1 (0 V at M6-TP1-3) and insert the 75 Ω terminal in
connector DIG OUT1.
• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at the same kV level as before and:
- Adjust potentiometer M6-PT1 (GAIN) to get an output signal of 700 mV from the D/A converter
(see figures 5 and 8).
- Move the oscilloscope to M6-TP2-1 (0 V at M6-TP2-3).
- Adjust potentiometer M6-PT2 (GAIN) to get an output signal of 700 mV from the D/A converter
(see figures 5 and 8).
- Move the oscilloscope to M6-TP3-1 (0 V at M6-TP3-3).
- Adjust potentiometer M6-PT3 (GAIN) to get an output signal of 700 mV from the D/A converter
(see figures 5 and 7).

700 mV

Fig. 5

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

JP10 JP9 J3 PT2 PT1

Fig. 6
M7 (SBFM07 board)

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

TP3 PT3 TP2 PT2 TP1 PT1

Fig. 7
M6 (SBFM06 board)

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.2.6 AUTOMATIC DOSE CONTROL

Automatic dose control involves reading the video signal.


There are two steps in the adjustment procedure:
- adapting the signal from the camera,
- setting the reference dose value using the relevant Setup procedure.

Note: The dose must be measured on the face of the I.I. tube. Given that the I.I. tube is fitted with a
grid, you must first remove the grid to in order to place the dosimeter probe to sit under it (see
figure 8) and then return the grid to its original position.

Measuring conditions:
- Nominal I.I. field.
X-Ray
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray beam. TUBE ASSEMBLY
- Collimator fully open.
- Detector probe on the leading edge of the I.I. tube
without grid, holding it at the edge (see figure 8).
- Select µR/s on the dosimeter.
Filter
- Select manual fluoroscopy.
(2 mm Cu)

Grid

Dosimeter

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Fig. 8

4.2.6.1 SETTING THE REFERENCE DOSE

Use the options in the SETUP4 menu on the


touch screen panel (SET DOSE column) to
adjust the X-ray dose.

You can only access this stage of the Setup


after entering the technical password:
“2006”.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

This table lists the adjustments and the accepted range of settings for each parameter:

Adjustment of the working X-ray dose in continuous and


SET DOSE pulsed fluoroscopy modes.

Settings Notes
REAL DOSE Light level read by TV camera, This is the value of the detected
proportional to the X-ray dose. in the set reading area (see
para. 4.1 in this Part of the
manual) using the 8 bit format (0
- 255).
REFER. DOSE To set the reference dose in Accepted range: Set the corresponding value for
continuous and pulsed 0 - 255 Normal Dose.
fluoroscopy modes
Typically: 135
FLUORO HYST. To set the hysteresis for Accepted range: Automatic control is stable when
automatic dose control in 5 - 30 the detected dose falls within
continuous fluoroscopy. the hysteresis interval.
Typically: 12

Procedure:

• Select nominal I.I. field.

• Select manual continuous fluoroscopy and normal dose.

• Give the X-ray command and set the kV to get a dose of 35 µR/s on the
dosimeter.

• Read the REAL DOSE value during X-ray emission and then set this value in the
REFER. DOSE field.
Typical parameter settings: 100 - 150.

• Check the speed and constancy of kV adjustments in automatic continuous


fluoroscopy mode.
If necessary, change the FLUORO HYST. parameter (this adjusts the hysteresis
value using automatic kV correction):

- There may be fluctuations around the required kV value if the parameter setting is too low.
- If set too high, dose control will only be approximate and so lead to variations in the video signal.
Typical parameter setting: 12.

• Quit the Set-Up procedure.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3 VIDEO ADJUSTMENTS FOR VERSIONS 3, 4, 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter) - Video Processor

4.3.1 PRESETTINGS
X-Ray
TUBE ASSEMBLY
Measuring conditions:
- Nominal I.I. field.
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray beam.
- Collimator fully open.
- Remove the grid on the I.I. tube and place the Filter
detector probe on the leading edge of the I.I. (see (2 mm Cu)
figure 9 on the right).
- Select manual fluoroscopy. Grid
- Set the kV to get an X-ray dose of 35 µR/s.

Dosimeter

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Fig. 9

4.3.2 ADJUSTING THE IRIS

Measuring conditions: See para. 4.3.1 above.

• Check setting in SETUP / HARDWARE SETTINGS / PRE-PROCESSING :


Dynamic Range = 1:3 (see para. 4.3.7 in Part 2 of this manual).

With reference to figure below:


• Loosen grub screw "F" (marked IRIS) to rotate iris adjustment shaft “G”.
• Give the X-ray command at 35 µR/s, corrected.
• Use a pin or small screwdriver to turn shaft “G” until you get an image with a mean video level
reading of 2048 LSB (±10%) in the centre of the monitor (measure using the Pixel View Manager
function described below).
• Tighten grub screw "F" to fix the position of the iris.

F G (iris adjustment)

Fig. 10

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.2.1 PIXEL VIEW MANAGER

Use the Pixel View Manager function to check the video signal level: enable this function using the
Overlay Manager function in the Post Processing group in the working frame on the working monitor:

The Neighbor field in the Statistics menu lets you select the part of the image whose values you want to
read. You can measure the levels in four differently sized squares:
- 7x7 pixels
- 9x9 pixels
- 15x15 pixels
- 31x31 pixels

Take the touch-pad pointer to the part of the image in question and check the value shown in the
Mean field.

The following values are also shown:


- Center (the value at the centre of the chosen square)
- Min
- Max
- Std Dev (standard deviation)

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.3 ADJUSTING THE TV CAMERA (625 LINES) - FOR VERSIONS 3, 4 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

The CD100ca TV camera is pre-set in the factory. You may, however, need to adjust this again if the I.I.
tube or the lens unit has been replaced. Adjustment may also become necessary after correcting a loss
in the I.I. tube conversion factor.

Measuring conditions: See para. 4.2.1 above.

• Move the oscilloscope to TP5 (CCD-Board).

• Command manual fluoroscopy.

• Adjust potentiometer P3 (VIDEO GAIN) on CCD-


Board to get a video signal reading of 230 mV on the
oscilloscope.

Fig. 11

TP7

P3 (Video Gain)

TP10

TP5

Fig. 12
CCD board

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.4 ADJUSTING THE TV CAMERA (1K x 1K) - FOR VERSION 5 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

The CD100ca TV camera is pre-set in the factory. You may, however, need to adjust this again if the I.I.
tube or the lens unit has been replaced. Adjustment may also become necessary after correcting a loss
in the I.I. tube conversion factor.

Use the options in the SETUP 4 menu on the touch


creen control to adjust the dose (TV CAMERA
column). These let you:

- Adjust the gain and offset.


- Run the efficiency and connection tests.
- Enable noise reduction filters (NRF)

You can only access this stage in the Setup


after entering the technical password:
“2006”.

VALUE
FUNCTION
minimum TYPICALLY maximum
OFFSET 0 45 100
GAIN 0 38 100
NRF 0 0 3
TEST 0 0 2

4.3.4.1 TEST MODES

There are two possible settings for the TEST parameter:


- “1” - to activate TV camera Test1,
- “2” - to activate TV camera Test2.

These tests are useful when you want to check the efficiency of the TV camera connection cable and
the video processor reception/acquisition circuits.
You can run these tests in any image acquisition mode (continuous, pulsed or one shot fluoroscopy).

• Use Test1: the TV camera is forced to provide a constant video signal level at the output.

• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at min kV and then check that the video levels
fall within the following range: 1364 - 1370 LSB (DR= 1:2).

Note: Use the Pixel View Manager function to read the video level (see para. 4.3.2.1 above).

• Use Test2: the TV camera is forced to provide a constant video signal level at the output.

• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at min kV and then check that the video levels
fall within the following range: 2730 - 2736 LSB (DR= 1:2).

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.4.2 TV CAMERA SETUP

Follow the TV camera Setup procedure if you need to adjust the OFFSET or GAIN.
These adjustments are the same for all acquisition modes (continuous fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy or
one shot fluoroscopy).

a) Offset:

• Acquire images in manual continuous fluoroscopy mode at 40kV, making sure that the TV camera
cannot receive any light (close the collimators and insert a suitable metal filter to block the X-ray
beam).

• Adjust the Offset parameter to get a video level of between 1 and 100 LSB.

Note: Use the Pixel View Manager function to read the video level (see para. 4.3.2.1 above).

b) Gain:

The fixed value (typically 38) can be altered, if required, during subsequent adjustments.

Note: If the gain value is too low, the dynamics of the TV camera may be reduced.

c) Noise reduction filter (NRF):


You can choose between:
- OFF (filter disabled)
- 1 (min filtering)
- 2 (average filtering)
- 3 (max filtering).

Note: The filter lowers both the TV camera noise and the bandwidth. We only recommend using this if
you have no special resolution requirements.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.5 ADJUSTING THE READING AREA FOR AUTOMATIC DOSE CONTROL

The video signal reading area needs to be adjusted for correct automatic X-ray dose control.

• Set the reading area size you want using the Dose Zone parameter in the SETUP / HARDWARE
SETTINGS / PRE-PROCESSING menu (see para. 4.3.7 in Part 2 of this manual).

Fig. 13

Dose Zone value: Dose Zone Reading area diameter


0 1/5 image
1 1/4 image
2 1/3 image
3 1/2 image

Note 1: Enable the DISPLAY DOSE ZONE flag to view the reading area.
Note 2: The equipment is supplied with the reading area set as 1/3 image (Value 2).

You can change the size of the reading area directly from the working frame by using the
corresponding command in the toolbar:

• Select once and the reading area currently used appears in the
centre of the image:

• Press again to change the reading area size, each time making it bigger (i.e. from the smallest
possible size to the largest).

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.3.6 AUTOMATIC DOSE CONTROL

Automatic dose control involves reading the video signal.


There are two steps in the adjustment procedure:
- adapting the signal from the camera,
- setting the reference dose value using the relevant Setup procedure.

Note: The dose must be measured on the face of the I.I. tube. Given that the I.I. tube is fitted with a
grid, you must first remove the grid to in order to place the dosimeter probe to sit under it (see
figure 14) and then return the grid to its original position.

Measuring conditions:
- Nominal I.I. field.
X-Ray
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray beam. TUBE ASSEMBLY
- Collimator fully open.
- Detector probe on the leading edge of the I.I. tube
without grid, holding it at the edge (see figure 8).
- Select µR/s on the dosimeter.
Filter
- Select manual fluoroscopy.
(2 mm Cu)

Grid

Dosimeter

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Fig. 14

4.3.6.1 SETTING THE REFERENCE DOSE

Use the options in the SETUP 4 menu on the


touch screen panel (SET DOSE column) to
adjust the X-ray dose.

You can only access this stage of the Setup


after entering the technical password:
“2006”.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

This table lists the adjustments and the accepted range of settings for each parameter:

Adjusting the working X-ray dose in continuous fluoroscopy


SET DOSE
mode.
Settings Notes
REAL DOSE Light level read by TV camera, This is the value of the detected
proportional to the X-ray dose. in the set reading area (see
para. 4.1 in this Part of the
manual) using the 8 bit format (0
- 255).
REFER. DOSE To set the reference dose in Accepted range: Set the corresponding value for
continuous and pulsed fluoroscopy 0 - 255 Normal Dose.
modes
Typically: 135
FLUORO HYST. To set the hysteresis for automatic Accepted range: Automatic control is stable when
dose control in continuous 5 - 30 the detected dose falls within
fluoroscopy. the hysteresis interval.
Typically: 12

Procedure:

• Select the nominal I.I. field.

• Select manual continuous fluoroscopy and normal dose.

• Give the X-ray command and set the kV to get a dose of 35 µR/s on the
dosimeter.

• Read the REAL DOSE value during X-ray emission and then set this value in the
REFER. DOSE field .
Typical parameter settings: 100 - 150.

• Check the speed and constancy of kV adjustments in automatic continuous


fluoroscopy mode.
If necessary, change the FLUORO HYST. parameter (this adjusts the hysteresis
value using automatic kV correction):

- There may be fluctuations around the required kV value if the parameter setting is too low.
- If set too high, dose control will only be approximate and so lead to variations in the video signal.
Typical parameter setting: 12.

• Quit the Set-Up procedure.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4 VIDEO ADJUSTMENTS FOR VERSION 6 (see table 1 on preface chapter)

4.4.1 PRESETTINGS
X-Ray
TUBE ASSEMBLY
Measuring conditions:
- Nominal I.I. field.
- 2 mm Cu filter on X-ray beam.
- Collimator fully open.
- Remove the grid on the I.I. tube and place the Filter
(2 mm Cu)
detector probe on the leading edge of the I.I. (see
figure 15 on the right).
- Select manual fluoroscopy. Grid
- Set the kV to get an X-ray dose of 35 µR/s.

Dosimeter

IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Fig. 15

4.4.2 ADJUSTING THE TV CAMERA

The CD100ca TV camera is pre-set in the factory. You may, however, need to adjust this again if the I.I.
tube or the lens unit has been replaced. Adjustment may also become necessary after correcting a loss
in the I.I. tube conversion factor.

Use the options in SETUP3 menu on the touch screen


panel (TV CAMERA column). These let you:

- Adjust the gain and offset.


- Run the TV camera efficiency and connection tests.
- Activate the noise reduction filters (NRF).

You can only access this stage of the Setup


after entering the technical password:
“2006”.

VALUE
FUNCTION
minimum TYPICAL maximum
OFFSET 0 45 100
GAIN 0 38 100
NRF 0 0 3
TEST 0 0 2

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4.2.1 TEST MODES

There are two possible settings for the TEST parameter:


- “1” - to activate TV camera Test1,
- “2” - to activate TV camera Test2.

These tests are useful when you want to check the efficiency of the TV camera connection cable and
the video processor reception/acquisition circuits.
You can run these tests in any image acquisition mode (continuous, pulsed or one shot fluoroscopy).

• Temporarily set an exam with:


- Dynamic Range 1:2,
- Edge Enhancement OFF,
- Recursive Filter OFF,
- Smart Filter OFF.

• Use Test1: the TV camera is forced to provide a constant video signal level at the output.

• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at min kV and then check that the video levels
fall within the following range: 1364 - 1370 LSB (DR= 1:2).

Note: Use the Pixel View Manager function to read the video level (see para. 4.4.4.3 below).

• Use Test2: the TV camera is forced to provide a constant video signal level at the output.

• Give the manual continuous fluoroscopy command at min kV and then check that the video levels
fall within the following range: 2730 - 2736 LSB (DR= 1:2).

4.4.2.2 TV CAMERA SETUP

Follow the TV camera Setup procedure if you need to adjust the OFFSET or GAIN.
These adjustments are the same for all acquisition modes (continuous fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy or
one shot fluoroscopy).

a) Offset:

• Acquire images in manual continuous fluoroscopy mode at 40kV, making sure that the TV camera
cannot receive any light (close the collimators and insert a suitable metal filter to block the X-ray
beam).

• Adjust the Offset parameter to get a video level of between 1 and 100 LSB.

Note: Use the Pixel View Manager function to read the video level (see para. 4.4.4.3 below).

b) Gain:

The fixed value (typically 38) can be altered, if required, during subsequent adjustments.

Note: If the gain value is too low, the dynamics of the TV camera may be reduced.

c) Noise reduction filter (NRF):


You can choose between:
- OFF (filter disabled)
- 1 (min filtering)
- 2 (average filtering)
- 3 (max filtering).

Note: The filter lowers both the TV camera noise and the bandwidth. We only recommend using this if
you have no special resolution requirements.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4.3 ADJUSTING THE READING AREA FOR AUTOMATIC DOSE CONTROL

The video signal reading area needs to be adjusted for correct automatic X-ray dose control.

- Set the reading area size you want using the Dose Zone parameter in the SETUP / HARDWARE SETTINGS
/ PRE-PROCESSING menu (see para. 4.3.7 in Part 2 of this manual).

Fig. 16

Dose Zone value: Dose Zone Reading area diameter


0 1/5 image
1 1/4 image
2 1/3 image
3 1/2 image

Note 1: Enable the DISPLAY DOSE ZONE flag to view the reading area.
Note 2: The equipment is supplied with the reading area set as 1/3 image (Value 2).

You can change the size of the reading area directly from the working frame by using the
corresponding command in the toolbar:

• Select once and the reading area currently used appears in the
centre of the image:

• Press again to change the reading area size, each time making it bigger (i.e. from the smallest
possible size to the largest).

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4.4 ADJUSTING THE X-RAY DOSE AND IRIS

Use the options in the SETUP3 menu on the touch


screen panel to adjust the iris and the X-ray dose (SET
DOSE and SET IRIS LENS columns).

Adjusting the working X-ray dose in continuous fluoroscopy


SET DOSE
and pulsed HCF fluoroscopy modes.
Settings Notes
REAL DOSE Light level read by TV camera, This is the value of the detected
proportional to the X-ray dose. in the set reading area (see
para. 4.1 in this Part of the
manual) using the 8 bit format (0
- 255).
REFER. DOSE To set the reference dose in Accepted range: Set the corresponding value for
continuous and pulsed fluoroscopy 0 - 255 Normal Dose.
modes Typically: 135

FLUORO HYST. To set the hysteresis for automatic Accepted range: Automatic control is stable when
dose control in continuous 5 - 30 the detected dose falls within
fluoroscopy. Typically: 12 the hysteresis interval.
HCF HYST. To set the hysteresis for automatic Accepted range: Automatic control is stable when
dose control in pulsed HCF 5 - 30 the detected dose falls within
fluoroscopy. Typically: 12 the hysteresis interval.

Adjusting the iris in the lens unit.


SET IRIS LENS
Settings Notes
REAL IRIS Aperture of the iris in the lens Value detected using the 8 bit
unit. format (0 - 255).
IRIS SPEED Parameter that sets the speed at Accepted range: Set an appropriate value to get
which the iris moves. 1 - 10 smooth, fast opening of the iris.

Typically: 8
FLUORO 1:2 Max iris aperture in continuous Accepted range: Max aperture is linked to
fluoroscopy mode. “FLUORO 1:5” - 255. Dynamic Range 1:2

Typically: 175
FLUORO 1:5 Min iris aperture in continuous Accepted range: Min aperture is linked to
fluoroscopy mode. 5 - “FLUORO 1:2” Dynamic Range 1:5

Typically: 145
HCF 1:2 Max iris aperture in pulsed HCF Accepted range: Max aperture is linked to
fluoroscopy mode. “HCF 1:5” - 255 Dynamic Range 1:2

Typically: 140
HCF 1:5 Min iris aperture in pulsed HCF Accepted range: Min aperture is linked to
fluoroscopy mode. 5 - “HCF 1:2” Dynamic Range 1:5

Typically: 115

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4.4.1 ADJUSTMENTS IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY

Measuring conditions: - 2 mm Cu on X-ray beam leaving the collimator,


- dose probe under the grid.

• Select nominal I.I. field.


• Select an exam with Dynamic Range: 1:2 (if not available,
temporarily alter an existing exam).

• Select manual continuous fluoroscopy and normal dose.


• Give the X-ray emission command in continuous fluoroscopy
and set the kV to get a dose of 35 µR/s.
• Select iris adjustment parameter FLUORO 1:2.
• Adjust this parameter over the course of several emissions to get a video level of 2048 LSB (±10%) in
the centre of the monitor. Typical values: 170 - 220.
• Make a note of the REAL DOSE value during X-ray emission with video signal 2048 LSB (±10%) and
then set this in the DOSE PROG field. Typical DOSE PROG. values: 100 150.
• Select iris adjustment parameter FLUORO 1:5 and adjust to get a video level of 2048 LSB (±10%) in the
centre of the monitor. Typical values: 130 - 180.
• Check the speed and constancy of the kV adjustments in automatic continuous fluoroscopy.
If necessary adjust the FLUORO HYST. Parameter: this alters the hysteresis value for automatic kV
correction:
- There may be fluctuations around the required kV value if the parameter setting is too low.
- If set too high, dose control will only be approximate and so lead to variations in the video signal.
Typical parameter setting: 13.

4.4.4.2 ADJUSTMENTS IN PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY

Measuring conditions: - 2 mm Cu on X-ray beam leaving the collimator,


- dose probe under the grid.

• Select nominal I.I. field.


• Select an exam with Dynamic Range: 1:2 (if not available, temporarily alter an existing exam).

• Select pulsed HCF fluoroscopy at 12 i/s, manual kV adjustment and normal dose.
• Give the X-ray emission command in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy and set the kV to get a dose of 4
µR/frame.
• Select iris adjustment parameter HCF 1:2.
• Adjust this parameter over the course of several emissions to get a video level of 2048 LSB (±10%) in
the centre of the monitor. Typical values: 140 - 190.
• Check that the REAL DOSE value is the same as that for continuous fluoroscopy (±10%) during X-ray
emission with video signal 2048 LSB 2048 LSB (±10%).
• Select HCF 1:5 and adjust to get a video level of 2048 LSB (±10%) in the centre of the monitor.
Typical values: 110 - 160.
• Check the speed and constancy of the kV adjustments in automatic pulsed fluoroscopy.
If necessary adjust the HCF HYST. Parameter: this alters the hysteresis value for automatic kV
correction:
- There may be fluctuations around the required kV value if the parameter setting is too low.
Typical parameter setting: 13.
Note: The system requires that the kV set by the automatic dose control in pulsed fluoroscopy mode is
the same (±1 kV) as that for continuous fluoroscopy. If this is not the case, check that the mA
adjustments are correct (for continuous and/or pulsed fluoroscopy).

• Quit the Set-Up procedure.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.4.4.3 PIXEL VIEW MANAGER

Use the Pixel View Manager function to check the video signal level: enable this function using the
Overlay Manager function in the Post Processing group in the working frame on the working monitor:

The Neighbor field in the Statistics menu lets you select the part of the image whose values you want to
read. You can measure the levels in four differently sized squares:
- 7x7 pixels
- 9x9 pixels
- 15x15 pixels
- 31x31 pixels

Take the touch-pad pointer to the part of the image in question and check the value shown in the
Mean field.

The following values are also shown:


- Center (the value at the centre of the chosen square)
- Min
- Max
- Std Dev (standard deviation)

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.5 ADJUSTING THE MONITOR (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions only)

You must check the brightness and contrast of the monitors at regular intervals.
For this reason, a test pattern appears every time you open a new study.

- The test image below appears on both monitors.

- Adjust the brightness and contrast on both monitors to view the entire grey scale (the brightness % is
shown in each square) More specifically, you should be able to see:

- the grey square in the black box (position A),


- the grey square in the white box (position B).

A B

The entire adjustment procedure is shown below, with details of the controls needed if a monitor is
replaced.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4.5.1 ADJUSTING THE MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST

Valid for the following models:


- Model: IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1152 19” monochrome
- Model: IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1165 19” colour

Use the dual function OSD control knob:

Control knob

1) Access the main menu.

2) Select the Input Source Settings menu.

3) Select:
- Analog VGA if the monitor is connected via VGA
connector,
- or Analog BNC if the monitor is connected via
BNC connector.

4) Select the color Mode Setting menu.

5) Select Gamma and set “Dicom”.

Note: You cannot adjust the brightness and contrast


further once the DICOM curve is set, as these
values are set by the DICOM curve itself.

revision 0 PART 4 page 4.24


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 04
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5 ANNEXES

5.1 POTENTIOMETER LIST

Board Potentio. Value Name Notes


B1 P1 500k HIGH SPEED TIME 800 ms
(RkMC) P2 1k LOW SPEED VOLTAGE 60 Vac

B3 P1 2K SET 1 V=-100mA ON TP13


(RkFS) P2 2K MANUAL SET FILAMENT Fixed: do not touch
P3 10K FREQ. 16 kHz
B4 P1 10K UP SPEED
(ASAC) P2 2K CURRENT LIMITATION
P3 10K DOWN SPEED
PSM05 P1 2K I MAX
(Inverter Control) P2 2K mA FLUO OFFSET ADJ Fixed: do not touch
P3 2K FREQ. ADJ
PSM06 P1 20K
(X-Ray tube) P2 20K Fixed: do not touch
P3 20K
P4 20K
PSM15 P1 1K
Inverter Driver) Fixed: do not touch

SBFM-M6 PT1 DIGIT OUT1 GAIN


(SBFM06) PT2 DIGIT OUT2 GAIN
PT3 DIGIT OUT3 GAIN
SBFM-M7 PT1 VIDEO IN GAIN
(SBFM07) PT2 VIDEO IN OFFSET
SW1 H. PHASE
CCD-Board P1 20K SUBSTRATE VOLTAGE
(CCDH) P2 20K RESET GATE VOLTAGE Fixed: do not touch
P3 10K VIDEO GAIN
Optical iris lens P1 10K FEEDBACK IRIS POSITION

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2 LEDS LIST

Board LED Colour Name Notes / Function


B1 LD1 green POWER ON
(RkMC) LD2 yellow WATCH DOG OK
LD3 green POWER ON
LD4 green POWER ON
LD5 green POWER ON
LD6 yellow START STATOR
LD7 yellow UP/DOWN Column Safety command
LD8 green POWER ON
LD9 yellow PREP
LD10 yellow RAD
LD11 yellow ENABLE RAD
LD12 yellow FLUORO
LD13 yellow PULSED FLUORO
LD14 yellow ONE SHOT
LD15 yellow N.U.
LD16 yellow COM XRAY
LD17 green X RAY ENABLE
LD18 green FILM RAD
LD19 green RAD MODE
LD20 green INVERTER SUPPLY
LD21 green PRE X-RAY
LD22 green HIGH SPEED
LD23 green LOW SPEED
LD24 green WATCH DOG 4Hz
LD25 yellow INV. FAULT
LD26 yellow KV>85%
LD27 yellow N.U.
LD28 yellow N.U.
LD29 yellow N.U.
LD30 yellow N.U.
LD31 yellow READY FLUORO
LD32 green N.U.
LD33 green N.U.
LD34 green REQ. ACQ
LD35 green N.U.
LD36 green N.U.
LD37 green N.U.
LD38 green N.U.
LD39 green N.U.
LD40 yellow N.U.
LD41 yellow STATOR OK
LD42 yellow FILAMENT OK
LD43 yellow COLUMN UP INPUT
LD44 yellow COLUMN DOWN INPUT
LD45 green LAMP ON
LD46 green N.U.
LD47 green LARGE FILAMENT
LD48 green N.U.
LD49 green N.U.
LD50 green N.U.
LD51 green COLUMN UP OUTPUT
LD52 green COLUMN DOWN OUTPUT
B2 LD1 green POWER ON
(µP376) LD2 green WATCH DOG OK
LD3 green CYCLE 2Hz
B3 LD1 green FILAMENT POWER SUPPLY
(RkFS) LD2 green -15 VDC
LD3 green +15 VDC

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Board LED Colour Name Notes / Function


LD4 yellow LARGE FILAMENT
LD5 red FILAMENT FAULT
LD6 green FILAMENT OK
B4 LD1 Green MOTOR COMMAND
(ASAC) LD2 Green MOTOR RUNNING
LD3 red OVER CURRENT LIMITATION
B6 LD1 green POWER ON .
(RkCO) LD2 yellow WATCH DOG
LD3 yellow ENCODER ROTATION
LD4 yellow PUSH
B7 LD1 yellow ZOOM1
(RkCA) LD2 yellow WATCH DOG 20 Hz
LD3 yellow ZOOM2
LD4 green LASER ON
LD5 yellow READ DAP
LD6 green POWER ON
B20 LD1 green +24V7 POWER SUPPLY
(ASPS) LD2 yellow C-ARM CONNECTED
LD3 yellow C-ARM: ON
PSM05 LD1 red DRIVER FAULT
(Inverter Control) LD2 red ∆ kV MAX
LD3 red kV > 110%
LD4 red kV MIN
LD5 red I prim. MAX
LD6 yellow COM.1
LD7 yellow COM.2
LD8 yellow PRE-RX
LD9 yellow RX
LD10 yellow RAD MODE
LD11 green +15V
LD12 green -15V
PSM15 LD1 green SUPPLY
(Inverter Driver) LD2 yellow X-RAY ON
CCD-B1 LD1 green +24VDC
(CCDH)
CCD-B5 LD1 green +24VDC
(CCDPS)
Camera head: LD1 green POWER ON
CD1030ca

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3 FUSE LIST

Board Fuse Value Name Notes


STATIVO F1 20 AT INVERTER SUPPLY
F2 20 AT INVERTER SUPPLY
TR1-F1 800 mAT 230 V
TR1-F2 630 mAT 150 V
B1 F1 500 mAT 24 VM
(RkMC) F2 1.25 AT 24 VM
F3 2.5 AT 24 VM
F4 500 mAT +15 VM
F5 500 mAT -15 VM
B2 F1 630 mAT MAIN SUPPLY
(µP376) F3 315 mAT 24 V
F4 630 mAT +5V1
B4 F1 10 AT +24 Vac
(ASAC)

B5 F1 10 A T MAIN Starter supply


(ASSR) F2 10 A T MAIN Starter supply
F3 500 mA T MAIN Control supply
B20 F1 315 mA T MAIN Supply
(ASPS) F2 1AT 21 Vac

PSM03 F1 63 A Main Inverter


(Power Board)

PSM15 F1 200 mA T MAIN Power supply PSM15 board


(Driver Board)

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AT 120V AC

The equipment may be set to receive 120V AC mains power.

• Isolating transformer TR1 must be fed using the120V AC input:


On terminal board TB2: - connect wire E to TB2-pin4
- connect wire F to TB2-pin2

• The two primary windings on transformer TR1 must be connected in parallel to board ASPS 00:
- point A to point B
- point C to point D

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

When fed with 120 V AC, the equipment works in basically the same manner, except for the fact that:

• The power of X-ray emission in radiography mode is halved:


o 40kV – 32mA and 100kV – 14mA for STANDARD radiography
o 40kV – 50mA and 100kV – 20mA for HIGH POWER radiography

• The power of X-ray emission in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy mode is halved (version 6 - see table 1 on
preface ):
o 40kV – 0.8mA and 70kV – 20mA

The adjustments needed for the reduced rate of X-ray emission are described below.

Access the adjustment options by opening the Setup3 menu on the touch screen panel (SET KV, I-FIL
and RX COLLIMATOR) as described in para. 4.1 in Part 2 of this manual.

This menu has two pages:

PAGE 1: PAGE 2:

The table below shows the necessary adjustments and the accepted range for each parameter:

SETUP 3 - Page 1 - MAIN POWER SUPPLY 120V


FUNCTION VALUE
minimum TYPICAL maximum
REAL SET kV detected by the equipment
SET KV SET 40 kV 450 550
SET 120 kV 1500 1600
0.2 mA (40 kV) 200 500
I-FIL 1 Continuous fluoro.
5 mA (70kV) 300 600
32 mA (40kV) 400 800
I-FIL 2 Standard radiogr.
14 mA (100kV) 350 750
SET I-FIL
50 mA (40kV) 450 750
I-FIL 3 High power radiogr.
20 mA (100kV) 400 700
0.8 mA (40kV) 350 600
I-FIL 4 HCF (optional)
20 mA (70kV) 450 700

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1 ADJUSTING THE kV AND mA

Follow the procedure for adjusting the radiological


parameters using the functions in page 1 of SETUP 3:

• Adjusting the set kV.

• Adjusting the filament current in:


- Continuous fluoroscopy (I-FIL 1)
- Radiography:
- standard (I-FIL 2)
- high power (I-FIL 3)
- Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (I-FIL 4, optional).

• Checking the kV applied to the X-ray tube.

• Checking the anode mA.

You must enter the technical password to access these stages in the setup procedure: “2006”.

Note1: Press the encoder dial twice to confirm the new settings and quit the Setup procedure: the first
time you press this, you confirm the parameter settings; the second time, you close the setup
menu.

Attention

The procedure requires that the voltage is measured at the points shown below:

- To measure the SET kV: connect an oscilloscope or digital voltmeter (DC) between CP1-10 (+)
and Tp5 (-) on inverter board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 20kV.

- To measure the real kV connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on inverter
board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 20kV.

- To measure the anode mA in fluoroscopy connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp2 (+) and
Tp5 (-) on inverter board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 1mA.

- To measure the anode mA in radiography connect an oscilloscope (DC) between Tp4 (+) and
Tp5 (-) on board PSM05.
The format is 1V = 10 mA.

- To measure the anode mA in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (optional), connect an oscilloscope (DC)
on board PSM05.
- mA<10 between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-). The format is 1V = 1 mA.
- mA>10 between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-). The format is 1V = 10 mA.

- To measure the SET filament voltage connect an oscilloscope or digital voltmeter (DC) between
Tp13 (+) and Tp8 (-) on board B3.
The format is 1V ≅ 100mA (filament).

- To measure the Filament current (Ifilament) connect a TRUE RMS reading ammeter in the place of
jumper B3 - CM3: 1-3 (scale limit: ≥1A AC).

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

This table summarises the above measuring points:

Measuring Points
SET kV PSM05: CP1-10, Tp5
real kV PSM05: Tp3, Tp5
mA continuous fluoro / pulsed HCF fluoro for i<10 mA PSM05: Tp2, Tp5
mA radiography / pulsed HCF fluoro for i>10 mA PSM05: Tp4, Tp5
SET I-FIL B3: Tp13, Tp8
IFilament B3 - CM3: 1-3

BOARD PSM05

BOARD B3
(RkFS 00)

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1.1 ADJUSTING THE SET kV

a) ADJUSTING THE MAX SAFE kV FOR THE INVERTER

- Check the position of jumpers J2A and J2B (2-3) on board PSM05: this sets the max safe value for the
inverter at 120 kV.

b) ADJUSTING THE SET kV

• Connect a digital voltmeter (DC) to inverter board PSM05 between CP1-10(+) and Tp5(-);

• Select field: SET 40 kV


- adjust the parameter to get a reading of: 2.00 V
- check the setting in the REAL kV field: 40kV±1kV.

• Select field: SET 120 kV


- adjust the parameter to get a reading of: 6.00 V
- check the setting in the REAL kV field: 120kV±1kV.

c) CHECKING THE ADJUSTMENT

• Confirm the new parameter setting and quit the Setup procedure (press twice on the encoder).
Select all the intermediate kV values in the FLUOROSCOPY frame and check that the voltage
shown on the voltmeter is: V=kVset/20 ± 25mV
(e.g.: at 100 kV you should get V = 5 V ± 25 mV).

The “SET kV ERROR” appears if the REAL kV value differs from the set value by more than ±6 kV
during X-ray emission.

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1.2 ADJUSTING THE FILAMENT CURRENT

There are two stages to this:

a) Preliminary adjustments, only needed if board B3 needs to be fully adjusted.

b) Adjustment of the filament current in the envisaged working modes to get the required anode mA
values.

The table below shows, in steps of 10 kV, the values for the anode mA associated to the typical kV and
the filament current* (detected on a test monoblock).

* Note: By filament current we mean the current in the primary circuit in the filament transformer.

FIXED ANODE VERSIONS


I-FIL 2 I-FIL 3
I-FIL 1
standard radiogr. high power radiogr.
SET kV kV continuous fluoro.
( > 5mAs) ( < = 5mAs)
mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament

[V] [kV] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA]


2 40 0.20 220 32.0 50.0
2.5 50 0.60 247 28.0 40.0
3 60 2.80 283 23.3 33.3
3.5 70 5.00 298 20.0 28.5
4 80 4.68 294 17.5 25.0
4.5 90 4.16 291 15.5 22.2
5 100 3.75 289 14.0 20.0
5.5 110 3.40 285 12.7 18.1
6 120 3.12 282 11.6 16.6

ROTATING ANODE VERSIONS


I-FIL 2 I-FIL 3 I-FIL 4
I-FIL 1
standard radiogr. high power radiogr. pulsed HCF fluoro.
SET kV kV continuous fluoro.
( > 5mAs) ( < = 5mAs) (optional)
mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament mA IFilament

[V] [kV] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA] [mA]
2 40 0.2 206 32.0 50.0 0.8
2.5 50 0.6 228 28.0 40.0 2.4
3 60 2.8 262 23.3 33.3 11.2
3.5 70 5.0 275 20.0 28.5 20.0
4 80 4.6 273 17.5 25.0 18.7
4.5 90 4.1 269 15.5 22.2 16.6
5 100 3.7 267 14.0 20.0 10.0
5.5 110 3.4 264 12.7 18.1 13.6
6 120 3.1 262 11.6 16.6 12.4

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1.3 PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS

• Switch the equipment off.


• Connect an ammeter (with "true RMS" reading, scale ≥1 A) in the place of jumper B3-CM3 to
measure the filament current.
• Place jumper B3-JP1 at 1-2 (manual set filament).

1. Adjusting the mA reading


• Connect a digital voltmeter between B3-Tp13(+) and B3-Tp8 (-).
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V DC.
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P3 to get the max filament current.
• Adjust potentiometer B3-P1 to get a filament current of 300 mA.

2. Checking the max safe current of the small filament (fluoroscopy)


• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Check the safety of the max current by gradually increasing the filament current via
potentiometer B3-P2 until the safety device trips (typically Ifilament ≅ 410 mA).
LED B3-LD5 should light up.

Attention: The safety device stops the equipment. Switch off and reboot to continue working.

• Readjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V at Tp13.

3. Checking the max safe current of the large filament (radiography)


• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Check the safety of the max current by gradually increasing the filament current via
potentiometer B3-P2 until the safety device trips (typically Ifilament ≅ 510 mA).
LED B3-LD5 should light up.

Attention: The safety device stops the equipment. Switch off and reboot to continue working.

• Readjust potentiometer B3-P2 to get 3.00 V at Tp13.


• Return jumper B3-JP1 to 2-3 (automatic set filament).

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.1.4 ADJUSTING THE FILAMENT CURRENT

• Connect an oscilloscope (DC) to inverter board PSM05 between:


Tp2 (+ mA fluoroscopy) o Tp4 (+ mA radiography) and Tp5 (-).

1. Adjusting the Filament Current in continuous fluoroscopy mode (I-FIL 1)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-0.2mA.


• Give the X-ray command in continuous fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
0.2V (±5%) at Tp2, corresponding to 0.2mA (1V = 1mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
0.2 mA (±0.1mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 70kV-5mA.


• Give the X-ray command in continuous fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to get
5.0V (±5%) at Tp2, corresponding to 5.0mA (1V = 1mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
5.0 mA (±0.2mA).

2. Adjusting the Filament Current in standard radiography mode (I-FIL 2)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-32mA.


• Set 10mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in standard radiography and adjust the parameter to get
3.2V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 32mA (1V = 10mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 100kV-14mA.


• Set 10mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in standard radiography and adjust the parameter to get
1.4V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 14mA (1V = 10mA).

3. Adjusting the Filament Current in high power radiography (I-FIL 3)

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-50mA.


• Set 5mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in radiography and adjust the parameter to get 5.0V (±5%)
at Tp4, corresponding to 50mA (1V = 10mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 100kV-20mA.


• Set 5mAs.

• Give the X-ray command in radiography and adjust the parameter to get 2.0V (±5%)
at Tp4, corresponding to 20mA (1V = 10mA).

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4. Adjusting the Filament Current in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (I-FIL 4) – version 6 only:

• In Setup 3 select field: 40kV-0.8mA.


• Give the X-ray command in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to
get pulsed 0.8V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 0.8mA (1V = 1mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
0.8 mA (±0.1mA).

• In Setup 3 select field: 70kV-20mA.


• Give the X-ray command in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy and adjust the parameter to
get pulsed 2.0V (±5%) at Tp4, corresponding to 20mA (1V = 10mA).
• Check that the real mA is:
20 mA (±0.2mA).

5.4.2 CHECKING THE kV AND mA

After adjusting the mA, you need to check the kV value (i.e. the real kV) and the inverter mA.
The precision tolerances foreseen by standard EN 60601-2-7 are ±5% for the kV and ±10% for the mA.
If the kV is not correct, repeat the above adjustments.

a) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select manual fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01a.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS
kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.20 0.18 - 0.22
70 66.5 - 73.5 5.00 4.50 - 5.50
120 114 - 126 3.12 2.81 - 3.43

Fig. 01a: kV e mA in scopia continua a 70kV

Fig. 01a: kV and mA in continuous fluoroscopy at 70kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

b) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN ONE-SHOT FLUOROSCOPY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select manual one-shot fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01b.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS WITH FIXED ANODE


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.40 0.36 - 0.44
70 66.5 - 73.5 10.00 9.00 - 11.00
120 114 - 126 6.24 5.61 - 6.86

ALL VERSIONS WITH ROTATING ANODE


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.48 0.43 - 0.52
70 66.5 - 73.5 12.00 10.80 - 13.20
120 114 - 126 7.49 6.74 - 8.23

Fig. 01b: kV and mA in one-shot fluoroscopy (rotating anode) at 70kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

c) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN STANDARD RADIOGRAPHY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select radiography.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Set 10 mAs.
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01c.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS (MAIN POWER SUPPLY 120V)


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical range di accettazione
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 accepted range
[1V = 20kV] on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 32.0 28.8 - 35.2
70 66.5 - 73.5 20.0 18.0 - 22.0
120 114 - 126 11.6 10.5 - 12.7

Fig. 01c: kV and mA in standard radiography at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

d) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN HIGH POWER RADIOGRAPHY

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp4 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select radiography.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Set 5 mAs.
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01d.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

ALL VERSIONS (MAIN POWER SUPPLY 120V)


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 50.0 45.0 - 55.0
70 66.5 - 73.5 28.5 25.6 - 31.3
120 114 - 126 16.6 14.9 - 18.2

Fig. 01d: kV and mA in high power radiography at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
TECHNICAL MANUAL

e) CHECKING THE kV AND mA IN PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY (for version 6 - see table 1 on preface)

• Connect a two-channel oscilloscope:


- canal A between Tp3 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the real kV,
- canal B between Tp2 (+) and Tp5 (-) on board PSM05 to read the anode mA.
• Select pulsed fluoroscopy.
• Set the min kV value (40 kV).
• Give the X-ray command and read the kV and mA values on the oscilloscope:
- check that these are correct (see table below),
- check the wave-length by comparing it to the typical wave-length shown in figure 01e.
• Repeat the above steps, setting 70 kV and then 120 kV.

DIP340HR-WITH HCF ONLY (MAIN POWER SUPPLY 120V)


kV mA
set accepted range theoretical accepted range
on PSM05-Tp3,Tp5 on PSM05-Tp2,Tp5
[1V = 20kV] [1V = 1mA]
40 38 - 42 0.8 0.72 - 0.88
70 66.5 - 73.5 20.0 18.0 - 22.0
120 114 - 126 12.4 11.2 - 13.6

Fig. 01e: kV and mA in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy at 70 kV

revision 0 PART 4 page 5.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S4 05
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Part 5 : MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

Pages rev. date

CONTENTS I-1 to I-2 0 01/06/12

1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 1.1 to 1.4 0 01/06/12


1.1 General recommendations
1.2 Cleaning and disinfecting
1.2.1 Microbe contamination
1.3 Daily/weekly checks and inspections
1.3.1 Dose level
1.3.2 Max X-ray collimator aperture
1.3.3 Checking the safety of the stand column
up/down movement
1.3.4 Monitor adjustments (DIP340 versions only)
1.4 Six-monthly checks and inspections

2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE 2.1 to 2.32 0 01/06/12


2.1 Troubleshooting
2.2 Replacing components
2.3 Board SBFM76 configuration
2.4 SBFM video memory adjustments
2.5 Checks and adjustments for board B1 (rotating anode
versions)
2.6 Adjusting the I.I. tube power unit supply
2.7 Restoring the DIP340 video processor system hard disk
2.7.1 Restoring with Aconis True Image
2.8 Restoring the DIP340 video processor CPU BIOS
2.9 Upgrades
2.9.1 Main controller firmware
2.9.2 DIP340 video processor SW
2.9.3 Manual upgrades of the DIP340 video processor
equipment
2.10 Replacing the main power cable

3 SPARE-PARTS 3.1 to 3.4 0 01/06/12


3.1 List of spare-parts

4 SCRAPPING 4.1 0 01/06/12


4.1 Procedures and precautions

5 FITTING/REMOVING COMPONENTS 5.1 to 5.23 0 01/06/12


5.1 Fitting / removing the covers
5.1.1 Monoblock covers
5.1.2 I.I. tube cover
5.1.3 Stand cover
5.2 Fitting / removing the monoblock unit
5.2.1 Monoblock

revision 0 PART 5 page I - 1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2.2 X-ray collimator unit


5.2.2.1 Collimator
5.2.2.2 Dose area meter (optional)
5.3 Fitting / removing the Image System unit
5.3.1 TV camera and lens
5.3.2 I.I. tube
5.3.3 Laser unit (optional)
5.4 Fitting / removing the stand unit
5.4.1 Parking brakes
5.4.2 Stand wheels rotation chains
5.4.3 Adjusting the C-arm bearings
5.4.4 Replacing the inverter fuse
5.5 Fitting / removing the monitor unit components
5.5.1 Accessing the CCD 100/CA camera rack
5.5.2 DIP340 video processor
5.5.3 CD/DVD drive
5.5.4 Power unit
5.5.5 Monitor
5.5.6 Medicap300 (optional with SBFM)

6 ANNEX 6.1 to 6.7 0 01/06/12


6.1 Creating a back-up disk for the DIP340 video processor
6.1.1 Creating a ghost disk with Aconis True Image

revision 0 PART 5 page I - 2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

The equipment requires regular checks and maintenance. The following recommendations are aimed
at maintaining good operating and safety conditions.
The equipment contains mechanical parts subject to wear and tear as a result of their use. After a
prolonged period of use, it is possible that safety will be reduced due to wear and tear of the
components.
Regular inspections and maintenance are also needed to protect patients and operators from injury
arising from broken mechanical parts.
Correct adjustment of the electromechanical and electronic modules directly affects equipment
efficiency levels, image quality, electrical safety and the radiation exposure level to which both hospital
personnel and patients are subject.
The maintenance program, described in the paragraphs below, consists of checks and preventive
measures which are the responsibility of the owner and which should be carried out by expressly
authorised personnel.

Always use original spare-parts only whenever you need to substitute parts that may affect
machine safety.

1.2 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING

Do not use cleaning products that have a high alcohol content to clean the surfaces of the equipment.
Do not use corrosive detergents, abrasive products or solvents.
Adopt only methods that fully comply with existing safety standards (disinfecting and explosion
prevention procedures) to disinfect the equipment.

Adopt these precautions when cleaning and disinfecting the equipment:

- Switch the equipment off and unplug at the mains.


- Make sure that no liquids infiltrate the equipment to prevent short circuits and corrosion of
the electrical and electromechanical components.
- Use only a soft damp cloth and a soap solution to clean the panels.
- Wait for the panels to dry completely before using the equipment again.
- Monitors: pour some soap solution onto the cloth first and then clean the screens. Liquid
applied directly onto a monitor touch screen could penetrate the device and so damage it.

If using disinfectants that form explosive fumes, make sure that these have had a chance to
disperse before using the equipment again.

revision 0 PART 5 page 1.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 01
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.2.1 MICROBE CONTAMINATION

To avoid problems with microbe contamination for patients and operators, the user must ensure that
those parts of the equipment that could come into contact with the patient ( I.I. tube, monoblock and
the C-arm) are protected using disposable sterile sheets, or sheets that can be sterilised.

Disposable sterile sheets can be supplied on request.


Adopt only methods that fully comply with current safety standards to sterilise reusable sheets.

1.3 DAILY/WEEKLY CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS

Operators must receive special training to carry out the daily and weekly checks detailed in the table
below.
The other checks (see paragraph below) should only be carried out by qualified personnel authorised
to do so by the Technical Service.

Every day : - Check that the signals, displays, laser localizer and LEDs are working.
- Check that the warning and danger signs are not damaged.
- Check the efficiency of the fans at the rear of the monitor unit (VIDEO PROCESSOR
versions only)
- Check the X-Ray dose level (see para. 1.3.1, below).
- Check the max aperture of the X-ray collimator (see para. 1.3.2, below).
- Check the safe up/down movement of the stand column (see para. 1.3.3, below).
- Check the adjustment of the two monitors (see para. 1.3.4, below).

Once a week: - Check for oil leaks coming from the monoblock.
- Check the state of the cable sheaths.
- Check the state of the power connectors, the X-ray command footswitch and the
connections between the stand and the monitor unit.

1.3.1 CHECKING THE DOSE LEVEL

In order to prevent residual risks linked to X-ray emission should the system malfunction, or is not correctly
adjusted, we recommend carrying out the following check on the dose level on a daily basis,
immediately after switching on the equipment and before starting to scan patients.

a) Place one of the two copper filters supplied with the


equipment (2 mm Cu plate) on the monoblock
Give the command for continuous fluoroscopy.
Conditions:
- normal dose,
- automatic X-ray dose control mode,
- nominal I.I. field,
- X-ray collimator (iris or shutter) fully open.

C
- Check that the kV automatically set by the system
are equal (or within the tolerance) to those
indicated in the “X-ray dose verification” sheet
supplied with the filters.

revision 0 PART 5 page 1.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 01
TECHNICAL MANUAL

b) In the same way, make a second fluoroscopy exposure using the filters supplied with the equipment
(total 4 mm Cu):

- Check that the kV automatically set by the system are equal (or within the tolerance) to those
indicated in the “X-ray dose verification” sheet supplied with the filters.

The table here shows the typical kV values.

kV Tolerance
2 mm Cu 65 ±1kV
4 mm Cu 81 ±1kV

Find out why any kV values might not be correct.


Do not use the equipment if you suspect a malfunction: contact Technical Service.

1.3.2 CHECKING THE MAX APERTURE OF THE X-RAY COLLIMATOR

With the iris fully open, make sure that it can just be seen around the edge of the image. This
guarantees that there is no risk of incorrect calibration or the malfunctioning of the collimator.

1.3.3 CHECKING THE SAFETY OF THE COLUMN STAND UP/DOWN MOVEMENT

We recommend checking the electrical safety circuit that prevents any uncontrolled movements of C-
arm every day, within 20 seconds of switching the equipment on.
To do this:
• Press an “up” and a “down” button at the same time and keep pressed for a few seconds.

The column should not move when you release these buttons.
If, however, the column does move (first up and then down by about 1 cm), then there is a fault in the
electrical circuit.

Replace the B4 ASMC 00 board if there is a fault.

You also need to check the speed at which the C-arm moves:

- Use the “down” button on the stand to lower the C-arm completely.

- Now press the “up” button on the stand to raise the C-arm and make a note of the time it
takes to reach its top position. This should take more than 40 seconds; if not, adjust the speed
on the board, as explained in paragraph 3.4 in Part 4 of this manual.

There might be a fault in board B4 if you are unable to adjust the column speed. Replace this
board immediately to avoid unnecessary risks.

revision 0 PART 5 page 1.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 01
TECHNICAL MANUAL

1.3.4 CHECKING THE MONITOR ADJUSTMENTS (VIDEO PROCESSOR versions)

The two monitors display a test image every time you open a new study. Use this to check their
brightness and contrast levels (see para. 4.5 in Part 4 of this manual).

B
A

The monitors are correctly adjusted when you can see:


- the grey box inside the black square (position A),
- the grey box inside the white square (position B).

1.4 SIX-MONTHLY CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS

Carry out the complete Acceptance Test procedure once every 6 months or, in any case, in line with
current safety regulations.
Make a note of the results on the TEST SHEET (see para. 1.1 of Part 3 “ACCEPTANCE TEST”) together with
details of any action taken.

revision 0 PART 5 page 1.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 01
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE

2.1 TROUBLE-SHOOTING

The troubleshooting tables below give indications of the most common malfunctions plus their most
probable causes.

N° PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION


1 No stand commands work. No power supply at stand input. Check to see if the magnetothermal
switch has tripped: reset if necessary.
Check to see if the emergency
buttons on the monitor unit and stand
have been used: reset if necessary.
Check for voltage at connector TB1-
3.5 (stand).
Check for voltage on the secondary of
transformer TR1 on board B1 (stand).
2 Stand comes on, but no words Board B1 faulty. Check fuse F1 on board B1.
appear on the display.
3 Equipment works, but no X- Footswitch /radiography button Check footswitch cable and
rays. faulty. connector.
No alarm on the stand display. Check radiography button cable.
4 Working monitor stays blank. - Monitor faulty. Check position of the ON/OFF switch.
- Incorrect brightness and contrast Adjust settings.
adjustment. Check monitor fully / Replace.
- Video memory / processor faulty.

Video cable faulty. Check / Replace.


5 No X-ray image on the working TV Camera faulty. Check for video signal at output /
monitor. Replace.
I.I. tube faulty. Check I.I. tube power supply and/or
replace power supply unit.
6 Stand reads: Problem with power circuits on
boards or fuses have blown:
CG-RKMC: +24V FAULT F1 on TR1 or F4 on board RkMC
CG-RKMC: +15V FAULT F1 on TR1 or F5 on board RkMC
CG-RKMC: -15V FAULT F1 on TR1 or F6 on board RkMC
CG-uP376: +24V FAULT F2 on board uP376
7 Stand reads: No filament circuit power supply. Check fuses TR2-F6, F9, F10.
FILAMENT OFF X-ray tube filament broken. Replace monoblock.
Board B3 (RkFS) faulty. Replace board.
No jumper CM3/1-3 on board B3 Insert jumper.
(RkFS).
8 Stand reads: Check alarm LED on INVERTER board. Contact Technical Service.
INVERTER FAULT

9 Stand reads: During radiography the effective kV Check the mains voltage.
kV ERROR are 85% less than the set kV. Check the apparent resistance of the
mains circuit.
10 Stand reads: Fluoroscopy has exceeded 5'. Reset time with reset key on stand.
MAX FLUORO TIME
11 Stand reads: Monoblock overheated. Do not command X-rays and wait for
THERMAL SAFETY the monoblock to cool.
12 Stand reads: Inverter fuses F1 and F2 have blown. Replace fuses F1 and F2.
NO X-RAYS Inverter fuse broken. Check/Replace inverter fuse.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

N° PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION


Inverter broken. Replace inverter.
Drop in mains supply. Check mains voltage.
Check apparent resistance of mains
circuit.
13 Stand reads: The RAD button has been released Repeat radiography.
MAN X-RAY STOP too early during cassette
radiography.
14 Stand reads: Radiography has exceeded 5 s. Check mA.
MAX RAD TIME Check mA reading on board B1
(RkMC).
15 Stand reads: During preparation, the anode fails to Check fuses on board B5 (ASSR).
ANODE STARTER FAULT start turning. Check winding on monoblock rotor.
Board B1 (RkMC) faulty.
16 Stand reads: mA value has dropped below 10 mA Check mains voltage.
mA TOO LOW during radiography. Check filament power circuit.
Check Set-Up values.
mA value too low for more than 2 Check mains voltage.
seconds during fluoroscopy. Check filament power circuit.
Check Set-Up values.
17 Stand reads: Memory appears to be off. Check video processor power supply.
MEMORY DISABLED

18 Stand reads: Monoblock overheated. Do not command X-rays (unless


X-RAY TUBE TOO HOT absolutely necessary)and wait for the
monoblock to cool.
19 Stand reads: Video processor appears not to be Check processor power supply.
VIDEOP. OFFLINE connected.
20 Stand reads: The real kV value differs too much Check for discharging of the
KV READING ERROR from the Set kV supplied by the monoblock or inverter problems.
inverter.
21 Stand reads: X-ray collimator fails to send CAN Check power supply and
COLLIMATOR FAULT messages. collimator/CAN connections.
22 Stand reads: DOSE AREA METER not found during Check DAM connections.
DAM NOT CONNECTED initial reset.
23 Stand reads: DAM has not sent a valid number of Check DAM pulse signals.
DAM FAULT calibration pulses during initial reset.
24 Stand reads: Fluoroscopy pedal found to be Check efficiency of continuous
FLUORO. PEDAL CLOSED closed when system switched on. fluoroscopy pedal and connections.
25 Stand reads: 1SHOT pedal found to be closed Check efficiency of one-shot
1-SHOT PEDAL CLOSED when system switched on. fluoroscopy pedal and connections.
26 Stand reads: RADIOGRAPHY button found to be Check radiography button and
RX BUTTON CLOSED closed when system switched on. connections.
27 Stand reads: Iris not in correct position. Check for the feedback signal from
IRIS OFF-CENTRE the lens potentiometer and its motor
drive.
28 Stand reads: The cd1030ca TV camera is Check TV camera power supply and
TV CAMERA OFFLINE malfunctioning. CAN connections.
29 Stand reads: Board RkCA is malfunctioning. Check board RkCA power supply and
RKCA BOARD OFFLINE CAN connections.
30 Stand reads: Board 15RkMC has detected a RAD Check READY_ACQ signal activation
RX ORDER FAULT signal coming from board 15RkuP, circuits.
yet there is no X-ray request. Check the O_EXP signal from HIRIS
ACV.
31 Stand reads: A virgin EEPPROM has been inserted
EEPROM FAULT or the EEPROM is faulty.
32 Stand reads: The HMI display on the control panel Check power connections.
CONSOLE FAULT fails to respond to messages.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

N° PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION


33 Stand reads: Board 15RKCO fails to transmit CAN Check control panel connections and
CONSOLE OFFLINE status messages. power supply.

Note: The manufacturer undertakes to supply, upon request, full information (wiring diagrams,
component lists, calibration instructions, etc.) to assist qualified technical personnel in repairing
any equipment components that the manufacturer feels can be repaired.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.2 REPLACING COMPONENTS

The equipment is fully adjusted and set in the factory; simply install and check upon delivery.
Every time a component is replaced, a series of checks and adjustments are required.
Consult the table below which covers the most common situations.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, all chapter/paragraph references are to Part 4 of this manual
(Adjustments).

N. COMPONENT REPLACED ADJUSTMENTS AND CHECKS REQUIRED REFERENCE


1 CCD TV CAMERA: -- Check video adjustments:
- CCD100ca - Check focussing. Part 4, para. 3.1
- CD1030ca - Check camera centring. Part 4, para. 3.2
- Check video signal in fluoroscopy. Part 4, para. 4..x
- Check dose adjustment. Part 4, para. 4..x
2 Image Intensifier -- Check +24V at B3-TP12,TP13.
-- Adjust I.I. tube power unit settings. Part 5, para. 2..6
-- Check electronic zoom efficiency.
-- Check complete video adjustments:
- Check focus. Part 4, para. 3.1
- Check camera centring Part 4, para. 3.2
- Check video signal in fluoroscopy Part 4, para. 4..x
- Check dose control Part 4, para. 4..x
3 Monitor -- Check complete monitor adjustments. Monitor Manual
4 Monoblock -- Check “Set kV” adjustments Part 4, para. 2..2
-- Check filament current adjustments Part 4, para. 2..2
-- Check kV and mA Part 4, para. 2..2
5 Collimator -- Check collimator centring Part 4, para. 3.3
-- Check collimator adjustments Part 4, para. 2.3
6 SBFM video memory -- Check configuration Part 5, para. 2.3
-- Check video signal adjustments Part 4, para. 4.2
-- Check dose settings Part 4, para. 4.2
7 DIP340 video processor -- Check configuration Part 2, chap. 5
-- Check video signal adjustments Part 4, para. 4.3
-- Check dose settings Part 4, para. 4.3
8 Keyboard on stand control panel -- Check efficiency of all keys
-- Check efficiency of all LEDs
9 Boards on CD100/CA rack:
- CCDPS -- Check output voltage (+24V DC)
- CCDBUS -- Check fuses and connectors
10 Boards on stand:
- B1 -- Anode time/speed adjustments Part 5, para. 2.5

- B2 -- General equipment

- B3 -- Filament adjustments Part 4, para. 2.2

- B4 -- Column movement adjustments Part 4, para. 3.4

- B5, -- Anode rotation drive No adjustments

- B6 -- Control panel touch screen No adjustments

- B7 -- Board RKCA No adjustments

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.3 VIDEO MEMORY BOARD CONFIGURATION (SBFM76)

In the case of equipment fitted with VIDEO MEMORY (SBFM76/0 or SBFM76/110), the jumpers on boards
SBFM-07 and SBFM-06 are used to configure the boards (see tables below).

● BOARD SBFM-07

DYNAMIC RANGE JP1 JP2

1:2 OFF OFF


1:3 ON OFF Set D.R. 1:3
1:4 OFF ON
1:5 ON ON

VIGNETTING CORRECTION JP3 JP4

disabled OFF OFF


low ON OFF
normal OFF ON Set normal correction
high ON ON

ELECTRONIC CIRCLE SIZE


JP6 JP7

max OFF OFF Set max size


large ON OFF
small OFF ON
min ON ON

SIZE OF VIDEO SIGNAL READING JP10


JP9
AREA
Set max size
max OFF OFF
large ON OFF
Press the centring command on the stand
small OFF ON
control panel to view the size of the reading
min ON ON area.

Jumper position
JP5 OFF
JP8 OFF
JP11 OFF
JP12 OFF
JP13 OFF
JP14 OFF

● BOARD SBFM-06

Jumper position
JP1 2-3
JP6 OFF
JP7 OFF

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP11 JP12, JP13, JP14

SBFM-07 board

JP1 JP6, JP7

SBFM-06 board

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.4 ADJUSTING THE VIDEO MEMORY (SBFM)

The 2 boards SBFM 06 and SBFM 07 need to be adjusted after replacing the VIDEO MEMORY.
The table below sums up the adjustments required, already described in Part 4 of this manual (see
relevant paragraphs).

Reference
Board Function Adjustment
in Part. 4
SBFM07 Correcting the horizontal image centring Para. 3.2.2 Dip-switch SW1
Adjustment of reading area for dose control Para. 4.2.4 Jumpers JP9 and JP10
Correcting the video input gain Para. 4.2.5.1 Potentiometer PT1
Correcting the video input offset Para. 4.2.5.1 Potentiometer PT2
SBFM06 Adjusting the D/A conversion gain for 50 Hz output Para. 4.2.5.1 Potentiometer PT1
Adjusting the D/A conversion gain for 100 Hz output Para. 4.2.5.1 Potentiometer PT2
to Working Monitor
Adjusting the D/A conversion gain for 100 Hz output Para. 4.2.5.1 Potentiometer PT3
to Reference Monitor

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.5 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR BOARD B1 (ROTATING ANODE VERSIONS)

Check the following after replacing board B1 (in the rack on the stand):

● Adjustment of the anode time and speed


- Adjust potentiometer B1-P1 to get an active high signal (+15 V DC) at IC3-1 lasting 800 ms on first
pressing the RAD PREP button.
- Keep the RAD PREP button pressed and adjust B1-P2 to get 60 V AC between terminals TB3-1 and
TB3-2 on board B5 (ASSR).

● Adjusting the max radiography time


- Take jumper JP1 to 2-3, extract the radiography button and adjust P1 to get a delay of 5.1 sec
between TP7 and IC3-9.

- Return jumper JP1 to 1-2. P1 IC3 P2

TB3

Fig. 1
B1 board

TB3

Fig. 2
B5 board

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.6 ADJUSTING THE I.I. TUBE POWER SUPPLY

Note: The voltage only needs to be adjusted if the I.I. tube power unit has been replaced.

The grid voltage of the I.I. tube needs to be calibrated at the manufacturer’s default setting (Thales) for
the specific I.I. tube.

The values are indicated on the Test Report


supplied by the manufacturer (Thales) and
enclosed in the document bundle
(see Figure 3).

EXAMPLE

Fig. 3

Test Points and Potentiometers:


The power unit has Test Points (see Fig.4) with continuous voltage in proportion to the actual grid
voltage.

The table below shows which voltage rates need to be adjusted using the relevant test points:

Voltage U3: adjust with trimmer G3 to define the size of the input image to suit the selected zoom

Voltage U2: adjust with trimmer G2 to get the best resolution in the centre of the image

Voltage U1: adjust with trimmer G1 to get the best resolution at the edge/in the centre of the
image

Ratio
Test point Unit
(V test point / V grid)
TP1 for voltage U1 0.01± 2% V/V
TP2 for voltage U2 1± 3% V/kV
TP3 for voltage U3 0.1± 6% V/kV

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Setup procedure:

After replacing the power unit and connecting all the connectors from the I.I. tube, switch the
equipment and carry out the following operations:

Select the nominal field and adjust the voltage rates as shown in the Test Report for Normal Mode:

- measure at TP3 and adjust voltage U3 with trimmer G3 = typically 350 mV

- measure at TP2 and adjust voltage U2 with trimmer G2 = typically 600 mV.

- measure at TP1 and adjust voltage U1 with trimmer G1 = typically1.5 V.

Select zoom 1 and adjust the voltage rates as shown in the Test Report for Magn.1:

- measure at TP3 and adjust voltage U3 with trimmer G3 = typically 650 mV.

- measure at TP2 and adjust voltage U2 with trimmer G2 = typically 500 mV.

- measure at TP1 and adjust voltage U1 with trimmer G1 = typically 1.8 V.

Select zoom 2 and adjust the voltage rates as shown in the Test Report for Magn.2:

- measure at TP3 and adjust voltage U3 with trimmer G3 = typically 1.05 V.

- measure at TP2 and adjust voltage U2 with trimmer G2 = typically 700 mV.

- measure at TP1 and adjust voltage U1 with trimmer G1 = typically 1.5 V.

G3
G2
G1

0V

TP3 TP2 TP1


Fig. 4

Note: If you cannot find the Test Report, adjust the voltage rates at the typical values shown above
and then correct manually to get the best image. We recommend adjusting voltage U2 last, as the
central resolution of the image is affected by the other adjustments.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.7 RESTORING THE VIDEO PROCESSOR SYSTEM HARD DISK

The video processor is a PC-based device: it may, therefore, "crash", in which case you need to reset
the system disk.
As a result, the video processor is supplied with a back-up CD/DVD (exact copy of the system hard disk
upon delivery), and a CD containing the application that lets you make the back-up CD/DVD.

Note: If the OS or an application has been upgraded after delivery and installation of the module, you
need to install these upgrades again after resetting the system disk; alternatively you can ask for
an updated ghost CD/DVD.
The ghost disk can be created by following the procedure described in Part 5, paragraph. 6.1
using the CD/DVD writer on the video processor.

To restore the HD:

- Insert the ghost disk in the CD/DVD driver on the monitor stand and restart the video processor.
- Once the system is running, press “Del” to enter the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
- Select the Boot tab. The following page appears:

- Select Boot Device Priority and press ENTER.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- The following page appears:

- Check that the first Boot device is the DVD USB recorder and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select the Exit tab.

- The following page appears:

- Select Save Changes and Exit. Select OK and press ENTER.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- The system now restarts with the new configuration: the CD/DVD automatically loads the software
for the system disk restore (Acronis True Image).

2.7.1 RESTORE WITH ACRONIS TRUE IMAGE

- Click on “Acronis True Image” when the video processor restarts.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- The following page appears: click on “Recovery”.

- Click on “Next”.

- Select the file with the .tib extension on the CD/DVD and click on “Next”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select system disk C: (Disk 1) and click on “Next”.

- Select the disk used as the system hard disk “System (C:) [IDE Primary Master]”
(e.g.: Disk1) and click on “Next”.

- Select: “Yes, I want to delete all the partitions ...” and then click on “Next”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select: “No, I do not” and then click on “Next”.

- Click on “Next”.

- Check that the settings in the summary page are correct.


Click on “Proceed” to start the restore procedure.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- System disk restore: the Current operation progress bar shows you the status.

- The system disk restore procedure is now complete. Extract the CD/DVD, click on OK and quit the
application.

The video processor now automatically restarts with the restored system disk.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.8 CPU BIOS RESTORE OF THE DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR

The BIOS on the video processor CPU board may be lost as the result of a fault in the buffer battery on
the board, electrical interference in the mains network or a system hardware fault.

The BIOS restore procedure is described below.

- Start the video processor and switch the system on, keeping key Del pressed in order to enter the BIOS
SETUP UTILITY:

- Select the Advanced tab. The following page appears:

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select IDE Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select SuperIO Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select APM Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select Remote Access Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select USB Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select the PCIPnP tab.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select the Boot tab.

- The following page appears:

- Select Boot Settings Configuration and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select Boot Device Priority and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select Hard Disk Drives and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select the Chipset tab.

- The following page appears:

- Select North Bridge Configurations and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.24


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

- Select South Bridge Configurations and press ENTER.

- The following page appears:

- Check the fields shown in the figure and then press EXIT to quit.

- Select the Exit tab.

- The following page appears:

- Select Save Changes and Exit. Select OK and press ENTER.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.25


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.9 SOFTWARE UPGRADES

This chapter describes the update procedure for the:


- MAIN CONTROLLER software
- DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR software
- User and Technical Manuals.

2.9.1 MAIN CONTROLLER SW UPGRADES

The Main Controller software is found on board B2 - uP376 (stand).

Attention: Make sure you have all the necessary components close to hand before starting this
upgrade procedure.

Components required:

- IBM compatible PC, with RS-232 serial port and WINDOWS 98, NT, 2000, ME or
XP operating system (not supplied).
- SUB F/F 9-pin serial cable plus Gender Changer M/M (supplied)
- Flash Eraser application (supplied).
- Terminal application (supplied).
- File 68376.trm with TERMINAL application settings (supplied).
- File BASE.0 containing the new software.

Update procedure:

1) Remove rear panel on the stand:

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.26


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2) Connect the PC to the serial port used by board B2 - uP376 (CM8 connector - RS-232 SETUP) using
the F/F + Gender Changer cable:

3) Switch on the monitor unit and the stand. Run the FLASH ERASER application on the PC:

4) Select a serial communication port on the PC (e.g.: COM1) and connect by using the “OPEN
CONNECTION” command.

5) Check that the (green) word “ONLINE” appears in the Connection Status window.

6) Enter the technical password (TechService) and confirm with OK.

7) The application asks you to confirm that you want to delete the program on the flash memory:
confirm with OK.
Attention: On doing this you can no longer use the Main Controller software on the flash memory.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.27


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

8) Serial communication with the processor now stops; the Connection Status window reads “OFFLINE”
(red). The flash memory can now be upgraded with the new firmware.

9) Close the Flash Eraser application and run the TERMINAL program to open the setup file 68376.trm:

10) Switch the stand off and then back on again. Check that the Terminal window now reads: “DO
ERASING SECTORS?”.

11) Click on the ERASE FLASH button to complete the deletion of the memory. Check that the messages
confirming successful deletion of the FLASH-EPROM memory banks appear.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.28


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

12) When prompted to send the new software (message “SEND S RECORD”), select “Send Text File...” in
the “Transfers” menu.

13) Select the path for the BASE.0 file for the new Main Controller software and confirm with OK.

14) Check that the SW has been uploaded correctly (the progress-bar in the Terminal program slowly
fills with a series of dots).

15) Switch the stand off and back on again after uploading.

16) Close the Terminal application. The software has now been upgraded.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.29


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.9.2 VIDEO PROCESSOR SOFTWARE UPGRADES

The new software can be supplied on an upgrade CD.

The software packages installed on the DIP340 video processor are:


- DIP340
- Dicom Kit
- DGViewer.

To upgrade these:

• Copy to “C:\ Install” the installation directories on the upgrade CD:

• To upgrade the DIP340 software:


- Access the new directory and run the application DIP340_X.X.X_Setup.exe.

• To upgrade the Dicom Kit software:


- Access the new directory and run the application DicomKit_Setup.exe.

• To upgrade the SW DGViewer software (needed to view DICOM images and included on each burnt
CD/DVD):
- Access the new directory and copy the file DGViewer.exe to directory:
“C:\Program Files\Digitec\DicomViewer”.

You need to check the video processor configuration after upgrading the software: see
paragraph 4.4 in Part 2.

2.9.3 MANUAL UPDATES (DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR)

If the manuals are updated after installation of the system, you need to replace the obsolete pages.
The manuals are supplied on CD.

To update the manuals:

- Insert the CD with the new manuals in the CD/DVD drive on the equipment,

- Find the obsolete manuals in directory: C:\Program files\Digitec\RTP\Manuals

- Give these a new name (e.g. by adding “old” to their name) if you want to keep them.

Copy the new manuals to the same directory and give them the same names as the previous
versions:
operatormanual.pdf User Manual,
technicalmanual.pdf Technical Manual.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.30


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

2.10 REPLACING THE MAIN POWER CABLE

With use, the power cable could become worn or damaged (cuts, scratched).
Only authorised technical personnel should be permitted to replace this, when necessary.

Cable characteristics:
- Length 6m
- Form 2 conductors (blue-brown) + earth (G/V) cross-section 3 x 4mm2
- Ext. Sheath colour Grey
- Outside diameter 13mm
- Mixture PVC

You must order a new cable directly from the manufacturer.


Cable code: 550 16 002.

Follow the steps below to ensure the cable is connected and secured properly.

Switch the EM equipment off and unplug at the mains.

Access the rear of the monitor stand:

• Undo the 2 screws (V1) and the 2 screws (V2). You will need to remove the 2 plugs (T) to access the
screws (V2).
• Remove the front panel “C1”.

(Fig.26)
T

V2
C1

V1

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.31


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Remove the two clips securing


the cable

Remove the screw fixing the Earth


conductor to Earth terminal

Remove the two M4 screws to be able to remove


the two power conductors

- Undo the plastic ring nut (cable passage) at the rear of the monitor stand, as shown below:

Undo the ring nut

- Extract the old cable through the cable passage and then replace with a new cable (supplied by the
manufacturer, code: 550 16 002).

- Repeat the above steps in reverse order to connect and secure the new cable.

revision 0 PART 5 page 2.32


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3 SPARE-PARTS

3.1 LIST OF SPARE-PARTS

Note: - When ordering spare parts, please quote the code.


- If the item code is not shown in the list, please contact the authorised dealer.
- The numbering system used in the list refers to the figures below.
- Please contact the authorised dealer for parts that are not included in the list below, or that are
not numbered in the figures.

N° Description Code Notes / Model


1 Monoblock with fixed anode MF 66 001 IMD mod. I-40S 3,5 RF
Top monoblock cover 66 10 906B
Monoblock with rotating anode MR 66 001 IMD mod. I-40R 15 RF
Top monoblock cover: for 9” 66 09 905B
for 12” 66 10 906B
2 Image Intensifier:
9” TH 09 001 THALES mod. 9428 HP2 H224
12” TH 052K THALES mod. 9432 HP H975
3 Collimator (lead shutters) for 9” CO 66 001 RALCO mod. R605/010C/DASM +
9” secondary collimator
Collimator (lead shutters) for 12” CO 66 002 RALCO mod. R605/010C/DASM +
12” secondary collimator
Collimator (copper shutters) for 9” CO 44 001 RALCO mod. R605/010/DASM +
9” secondary collimator
Collimator (copper shutters) for 12” CO 44 002 RALCO mod. R605/010/DASM +
12” secondary collimator
4 CCD100/CA TV Camera 49 09 830
TV camera head board CCDH (B1): 60 01 010A
Lens 42 40 000
Rack CCD100/CA 60 03 210
Board CCDBUS (B0) 49 03 070
Board CCDPS (B5) 60 03 040A
CD1030ca TV Camera: 82 02 000
Board CD1030ca TV camera head: 82 00 100
Lens 42 50 000
Motorised lens (for version 6 only) 42 60 000
5 Stand:
Power transformer boards 210 VA 66 01 800
Actuator transformer 132 VA 19 02 110A
Column movement actuator ATTUATORE02
Inverter CONVERT.05 IMD mod. HF1 5kW
5A Touch screen display DISPLAYGT32-01
5B Touch screen encoder dial IU 59 001
Board B1 (RkMC) 66 01 100
B2 (µP376) 77 04 100A
B3 (RkFS) 66 01 200
B4 (ASAC) 19 10 010A
B5 (ASSR) 17 30 020
B6 (RkCO) 66 01 300
B7 (RkCA) 66 01 600
B8 (RkOO) 59 01 500
B9 (RkUD) 59 01 400
Footswitch:
6A 1 command 19 30 400
6B 3 commands 19 30 200

revision 0 PART 5 page 3.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 03
TECHNICAL MANUAL

N° Description Code Notes / Model


7 Radiography command button 19 02 100

Cable for Stand/Monitor unit connection


8A - VIDEO MEMORY versions 550 66 005
8B - VIDEO PROCESSOR versions 550 49 022
9 Dose Area Meter: DOSIMETRO02

10 Laser Localiser:
for 9” 44 10 000
for 12” 44 12 800
Single Laser Diode 44 10 012
Cassette holder:
11A for 9” 19 12 100
11B for 9” with Laser Localiser on tube side 66 09 300
for 12” 19 12 200
for 12” with Laser Localiser on tube side 66 12 300
Monitor Unit:
12A Keyboard + touchpad IU 59 002
12B Power unit 19 28 100
Isolating transformer 3KVA 17 10 120A
Board B20 (ASPS) 17 10 110A
B21 (IRR) 49 28 550
13 Monitor:
LCD 19” b/n IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1152 MO 19 004
LCD 19” colore IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1165 MO 19 003
14 Video Memory:
board SBFM76/4 60 03 034
15 Video processor:
DIP340MR SD 49 001
DIP340HR SD 49 002

revision 0 PART 5 page 3.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 03
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5A
11A
5B 10

11B

5 9

6B 6A

Note. Image shows version with 9” I.I. tube.

revision 0 PART 5 page 3.3


code 66 80 011 - Mti S5 03
TECHNICAL MANUAL

13
13

14
12A

15

8A 8B

12B

12B

Monitor Unit – SBFM version Monitor Unit - DIP340 version

revision 0 PART 5 page 3.4


code 66 80 011 - Mti S5 03
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4 SCRAPPING

4.1 PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS

When scrapping the device, special care must be taken when handling the following components as
these can be hazardous when scrapped:

- The I.I. tube contains a vacuum tube which, should it break, can send shards of glass flying and
disperse powder and gas that may be toxic; it also contains lead that must be considered a
toxic material.

- The LCD monitor contains a screen which, should it break, can send shards of glass flying and
disperse substances that may be toxic.

- The monoblock contains a vacuum tube which, should it break, can send shards of glass flying;
it also contains lead that must be considered a toxic material; it also contains exhaust oil which
must be disposed of in accordance with the current local regulations.

- The X-ray collimator contains lead: this is a toxic material and must be treated as such.

- The equipment contains printed circuit boards which contain a certain amount of lead: this is a
toxic material and must be treated as such.

- The batteries must be disposed of in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC (Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment = WEEE standards).

Other parts of the equipment are:


- ferrous material (frames etc.),
- plastic (guards etc.),
- wiring,
- optical materials.

These parts are not considered to be a potential source of hazards when scrapping the device.

All parts should be disposed of in accordance with the prevailing regulations in each country
at the moment of scrapping.

The symbolon the right appears on the equipment to remind you that the equipment
meets the European Environmental Directives (2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC,
2003/108/EC) and so must be scrapped in accordance with the relevant laws for
separated waste disposal.

This equipment must not be disposed of as normal urban solid waste: it must be taken
to an expert waste disposal centre or returned to the dealer, should you wish to
replace it with a new model.

revision 0 PART 5 page 4.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 04.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5 FITTING AND REMOVING COMPONENTS

Before attempting to assemble or remove any components, you must switch the EM equipment off
and unplug it at the mains.

5.1 FITTING/REMOVING THE COVERS

5.1.1 MONOBLOCK COVERS

To remove the panels covering the monoblock:

• Remove the 5 screws (V) and their washers.


• Extract the panel (C).

V
V

Fig. 1

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to remount the panels on the monoblock.

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.1.2 I.I. TUBE PANEL COVER

To remove the I.I. tube cover (C):

• Remove the 2 screws (V) and their washers.


• Extract the cover (C).

Fig. 2

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to remount the cover on the I.I. tube.

Note: Figure 2 refers to the 9” I.I. tube, but the instructions are valid for the 12” version, except for the fact that
this has 3 side screws (V).

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.1.3 STAND COVER

To remove the stand cover:

• Remove the 4 screws (V) and the plastic washers (R).


Attention: You can only access these screws after removing their protection plugs (T).
• Extract the cover (C).

Fig. 3a

R
V
T

Fig. 3b

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to remount the cover on the stand.

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2 FITTING/REMOVING THE MONOBLOCK UNIT

5.2.1 MONOBLOCK

Attention: - Before dismantling the monoblock, you must rotate the C-arm as shown in figure 4a (with
the I.I. tube fully extended: see arrow in figure) and engage brake “F” on the C-arm
support, making sure that this stops the C-arm correctly.
You also need to place a wooden wedge under the stand (see fig. 4a) to prevent the
equipment from toppling over when the monoblock is removed.

To remove the monoblock (see fig. 4b):

• Remove the monoblock panel (see paragraph 5.1.1 above).


• Disconnect collimator connector.
• Remove the collimator (see paragraph 5.2.2 below).
• Remove the plate holding the collimator cone (see paragraph 5.2.2.1-Fig.5b below).
• Remove the plastic protection (P) by undoing the 2 screws (V1).
• Disconnect all the cables connected to the board (S).
• Remove the support plate (A) for the board (S) by undoing the 2 screws (V2).
• Disconnect the monoblock connectors.
• Remove the 7 nuts (D) and their spring washers (R).
• Remove the monoblock.

wooden wedge
Fig. 4a

D
D
R D
D D
V1
V1
A D D
D P
V1

V2 S Fig. 4b

V2
revision 0 PART 5 page 5.4
code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2.2 X-RAY COLLIMATOR UNIT

5.2.2.1 COLLIMATOR

Note: If the equipment is fitted with a dose area meter, this must be removed first before attempting to
remove the collimator (see paragraph 5.2.2.3 below).

To remove the collimator (see Fig. 5):

• Remove the monoblock panel (see paragraph 5.1.1 above).


• Disconnect the collimator cables.
• Remove the 3 screws (V1) and then the cover (C1) from the collimator.
• Loosen the 3 grub screws (G).
• Extract the collimator (C2).

C2

F
C1

V2
V1

V1

V1

Fig. 5

To remove the collimator cone (see Fig. 5):

• Remove the 4 screws (V2)


• Remove the cone flange (F).
• Slide the cone out from the flange.

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to remount the collimator.

Note: Remember to check the centring of the collimator (see paragraph 3.3 in Part 4).

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.2.2.2 DOSE AREA METER (OPTIONAL)

The dose area meter (D) is fitted on a support plate (S) fixed to the column (C) by 4 screws (V1) .

If supplied at a later date, fit the dosimeter as follows:


• Remove the monoblock panel (see paragraph 5.1.1 above).
• Fit the 4 columns (C) on the monoblock support.
• Place the dose area meter (D) in its seat on its own support (S).
• Fix with the grub screws (G).
• Fix the support (S) to the columns (C) using the 4 screws (V1).
• Fix the dosimeter interface box (D1) to the plate (P) using the 2 screws (V2).
• Connect the dosimeter interface cable to connector CM6 on board RKCA (B7)

V1
V1

S
D
V1
V1 G

Fig. 6
P C
D1

V2
V2

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to remove the dosimeter.

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3 FITTING/REMOVING THE IMAGE SYSTEM UNIT

5.3.1 TV CAMERA AND LENS

CD100ca TV camera:

Valid for versions 1, 2, 3 and 4 (see Table 1 in the Preface).

To remove the TV camera head board (A) and the lens (O) from the image system unit:

Engage the C-arm locking brake before attempting to remove the image system components.
Take care not to allow the C-arm to move unexpectedly when removing the components, as the
weights are no longer balanced.

• Remove the I.I. tube cover (C) (see paragraph 5.1.2 above).
• Remove the counterweight unit (B) by undoing the 3 nuts (D) to make things easier.
Note. These counterweights are only found on the 9” I.I. tube + rotating anode model.
• Disconnect the video cable and the power cable from the TV camera.
• Remove the 3 screws (V1) and their washers to remove the lens (O).
• Remove the 3 screws (V2) for the camera head board (A).

D
A O

D
C
D

V2

Fig. 7a
V1

O
A
V1

V1

V2

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to return the TV camera and the lens again.

Note: The figure above shows a 9” I.I. tube, but the instructions are normally valid for the 12” version.
You can normally remove the TV camera and the lens in a 12” version without having to remove the
counterweights (smaller in size).

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

TV camera CD1030ca:

Valid for versions 5 and 6 (see Table 1 in the Preface).

To remove the TV camera (A) and the lens (O) from the image system unit:

Engage the C-arm locking brake before attempting to remove the image system components.
Take care not to allow the C-arm to move unexpectedly when removing the components, as the
weights are no longer balanced.

• Remove the I.I. tube cover (C) (see paragraph 5.1.2 above).
• Remove the counterweight unit (B) by undoing the 3 nuts (D) to make things easier.
Note. These counterweights are only found on the 9” I.I. tube + rotating anode model.
• Disconnect the video cable and the power cable from the TV camera.
• Remove the 4 screws (V1) and their washers from the TV camera and then remove this from the lens (O).
• Remove the 3 screws (V2) and their washers to remove the lens (O).

B O
D A

D
C
D

V2
V1 V1 Fig. 7b

A V1 V1
V2
V2

Repeat the above steps in reverse order to return the TV camera and the lens again.

Note: The figure above shows a 9” I.I. tube, but the instructions are normally valid for the 12” version.
You can normally remove the TV camera and the lens in a 12” version without having to remove the
counterweights (smaller in size.

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.8


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.2 IMAGE INTENSIFIER

Attention: Before removing the I.I. unit, you must rest the rear of the stand on a suitable block (see
figure 8a). You must also turn the C-arm as shown in figure 8b, ensuring that the
monoblock rests on a suitably strong surface.

Wooden ARC O 140F


ATS
SERIAL: XX XXX 66 XX
Via A . V olta,10
24060 Torre de' R ov eri (BG),ITALY

wedge

Fig. 8a Fig. 8b

To remove the I.I. tube (follow the same instructions in reverse order to remount this, taking special care that
the cables are positioned correctly without damaging them):

9” I.I. Tube

• Remove the I.I. tube cover (see paragraph 5.1.2 above).


• Disconnect all the power unit cables running to the I.I. tube, the CCD TV camera cables and the earth cable.
• Remove the power unit (A) by undoing the screws (V1) to make things easier.
• Remove the 4 plugs (T) to access the fixing screws (V2).
• Undo the 4 screws (V2). Support the I.I. tube when doing this to prevent it from falling.
• Remove the I.I. tube, taking care not to damage the cables.

V2 A
T

V1
A

Fig. 8c

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.9


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

12” I.I. tube


• Remove the I.I. tube cover (C) (see paragraph 5.1.2 above).
• Disconnect all the power unit cables running to the I.I. tube, the CCD TV camera cables and the earth cable.
• Remove the power unit (A) by undoing the screws (V1) to make things easier.
• Remove 4 screws (V2). Support the I.I. tube when doing this to prevent it from falling.
• Remove the I.I. tube, taking care not to damage the cables.

V2
V1

A
C

Fig. 9d

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.10


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.3.3 LASER LOCALISER (OPTIONAL)

If supplied at a later date, fit the laser localiser as follows:


• Remove the flange (A) on the grid (G) by undoing the 4 screws (V1).
• Fit the flange (B) using the 3 screws (V2), taking care to thread the 2 wires coming from the I.I. tube through
the slot.
• Connect the 2 wires to the lasers (in parallel) using connector AMP.
• Fit the flanged cover (C) using the 4 screws (V3).

A V1

G
V3 V2
C

B
V2
V3

V3 V2

V1

V3
Fig. 10

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.11


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4 FITTING/REMOVING THE STAND

5.4.1 PARKING BRAKES

If the braking system should fail, check the state of the brake pads “P” on the 2 side wheels. If you find that the
problem is due to these being worn, follow the steps below to replace the worn pads:

• Remove the cover on the leg of the stand (see paragraph 5.4.2 below).
• Raise the leg slightly so you can place a plank of wood under this, lifting the wheel from the ground (at
least 2 men should be used to do this).
• Remove the 2 screws (V) and their washers (R) fixing the hub covers (C); then remove the covers.
• Remove the nut (D) and extract the pin (P) from the wheel.
• Extract the wheel (A).
• Extract the pin (S) fixing the pad (P) and then remove the pad itself.
• Insert a new pad and then repeat the above steps in reverse order.

Fig. 11a

S
P
V
R P

C
D

R V
C
A

Fig. 11b

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.12


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.2 STAND WHEEL ROTATION CHAINS

a) To tighten the tension of the lower chains responsible for rotating the rear wheels:

• Remove the cover on the leg (C2) by undoing the 2 screws (V) and their washers (under the leg).

Remove the rear stand cover (C) for better access to tie-rods (T), as explained in paragraph 5.1.3
above.

C2

C1

Fig.12a
V V

• Loosen the counternut (D) and tension the chain using tie-rod (T).

Attention: Repeat the operation on both tie-rods symmetrically to avoid altering the direction of the
wheels.

• Tighten the counternut (D).


• Check the movement of the chain by using the steering handle.
• Finally, return the stand cover and leg covers.

Fig.12b

Instructions valid for both chains.

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.13


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

b) To remove and replace the upper chain responsible for rotating the wheels:

• Remove the rear cover on the stand (see paragraph 5.1.3 above).
• Unscrew the tie-rod (T) and extract the chain to be replaced.
• Insert the new chain, connect it to the tie-rod and tighten to get the right tension.
• Check the system works correctly using steering knob (M).
• Return the cover.

Fig.12c

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.14


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.3 ADJUSTING THE C-ARM BEARINGS

1. Remove the 8 plugs (T), using a small flat screw-driver


in order to access the lateral and front bearings
through the holes (F1), (F2), (F3) and (F4).

F3
F2

F4
F4
F1

T
Fig. 11a

2. Adjusting the front bearings “C1”:

• Take the C-arm to the position shown in fig.11b in order to align one of the holes (F4) with the eccentric pin
on one of the bearings (C1), while the holes (F1) are lined up with the grub screws locking the pins.
• Using a 2.5 mm Allen wrench in the hole (F1), loosen the grub screw (G1) on the eccentric pin (P1).
Adjust the play of the bearing by using a 5 mm Allen wrench in the hole (F4).
• Fix the position of the bearing by tightening the grub screw (G1).

P1

F4
F1

Fig. 11b
C1 G1

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.15


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3. Adjusting the front bearings “C2”:

• Take the C-arm to the position shown in fig.11c so that one of the holes (F4) is lined up with the eccentric
pin in the bearings (C2) .
• Adjust the play as explained above for bearings (C1).

F4

F1

C2 Fig. 11c

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.16


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

4. Adjusting the lateral bearings “C3” :

• Take the C-arm to the position shown in fig.11d so that the hole (F2) is lined up with the eccentric pin (P3)
on bearing (C3), while the holes (F3) are aligned with the grub screws (G3) fixing the pins.
• Using a 2.5 mm Allen wrench in the hole (F3), loosen the grub screw (G3) on the eccentric pin (P3).
Adjust the play of the bearing by using a 5 mm Allen wrench in the hole (F2) in the eccentric pin.
• Fix the position of the bearing by tightening the grub screw (G3).

Note: Repeat for both the bearings (C3)

P3

G3

F2

Fig. 11d
F3
F3

C3

5. Repeat step 4 on all the other pairs of


bearings (C4), (C5) and (C6) (see Fig.11e).

C4

C5

C6

Fig. 11e

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.17


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.4.4 REPLACING THE INVERTER FUSE

The inverter has a fuse “F1” (63A) inside, on board PSM03.


To replace the inverter fuse:

Switch the equipment off and unplug at the mains. Wait at least 5 minutes before accessing the
inverter to replace the fuse (LIVE PARTS: you must give the inverter time to discharge completely).

• Remove the right-hand rear panel on the stand (see paragraph 5.1.3 above).
• Remove the inverter from its support by undoing the 2 nuts (D1) and the screw (V1) (fig.19a).
• Remove the inverter cover by undoing the 4 screws (V2) (fig.19a).
• Remove the board (S) by undoing the 2 nuts (D2) in order to access board PSM03 holding the fuse (F1)
(fig.19b).
• Undo the 2 nuts (D3) to access the fuse (F1) (fig.19c).

Note You need to detach the inverter connections to fit/remove the fuse. Take care to reconnect
everything correctly after replacing the fuse.

V2

V2

TOGL IERE TENSIONE ED AT-


TENDERE 5 MINUTI PRIMA DI
APRIRE L'INVERTER O DI
SOSTITUIRE IL FUSIBILE F1.

SWITCH OFF THE UNIT AND


W AIT 5 MINUTES BEFORE
OPENI NG THE INVERTER OR
REPLACING THE FUSE F1.

V1

D1 D1
Fig. 19a

S F1

D2 D3
D2

D3

Fig 19b Fig 19c

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.18


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5 FITTING/REMOVING THE MONITOR UNIT COMPONENTS

5.5.1 VIDEO MEMORY RACK

Valid for versions 1 and 2 (Table 1 in the Preface).

a) Accessing the connectors on the rack (A) (Fig. 20):


• Remove the cable support (S) by undoing the 2 screws (V1).
• Remove the rear cover (C1) by
undoing the 5 screws (V2) and their
R
washers (R). T1 V2
These screws can only be
accessed by removing their
plugs (T1).
S

V1

C1

Fig. 20

You also need to remove the front cover


(C2) to access the rack (A) completely.
To do this, remove the 2 plugs (T) and
then the 2 screws (V3)(Fig. 21).

T V3

C2
A

Fig. 21

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.19


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

b) Replacing the rack:


• Remove the front cover (C2) (see point a) above).
• Undo the 4 screws (V4) and their washers.
• Extract the rack (A).

V4
A V4

V4
V4

Fig.22

c) Accessing the boards on the CCD100/CA camera rack:


• Extract the rack (A) (see point b) above).
• Remove the 2 screws (V5) and their washers
and then slide the rack cover forwards. V5

V5

Fig.23

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.20


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.2 VIDEO PROCESSOR


Front view
Valid for versions 3, 4, 5 and 6 (Table 1 in the Preface)

a) Accessing the connectors (rear cover):


• See the procedure at point a) in para. 5.5.1 in this
chapter (Fig.20).

Attention: You may need to disconnect the 2 fan power wires.

b) Replacing the video processor:


• Open the front and rear covers, as explained in para. P
5.5.1. above (Fig.20 e Fig.21).
• Disconnect all the connectors.
• Undo the 4 screws (V6) and their
washers fixing the Fig.24
processor (P) to the plate
(Fig.24).

• Extract the processor


from the front. V6
V6
P
V6
V6

5.5.3 CD/DVD DRIVE Rear view

Valid for versions 3, 4, 5 and 6 (Table 1 in the Preface)

Replacing the CD/DVD drive:

• Open the front and rear covers as explained in para. 5.5.1 above.
• Disconnect the power cable and the USB cable at the back of
the CD/DVD drive.
• Loosen the 2 screws (V7) and extract
the CD/DVD drive (M) .
• Disconnect the power cable
from the rear of the power
unit. M Fig.25
• Loosed the 2 screws (V8)
to extract the power unit
(A) on the CD/DVD drive. V7
A V7

V8 V8

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.21


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.4 POWER UNIT

To access the power unit:

• Undo the 2 screws (V1) and the 2 screws (V2). You need to remove the 2 plugs (T) to access these screws.
• Remove the front cover (C1) (Fig. 26).

V2
C1

• You also need to remove the rear unit cover (C2) to access the power unit.
To do this: undo the 2 screws (V3) and their washers, as well as the 2 nuts (D). V1
Watch out for the cables connecting the power unit to the cover (with the
connectors fixed to these). (Fig.27) Fig.26

To remove the power unit (P):

• Undo the 4 screws (V4) and their washers.


N.B. Disconnect the cables before extracting the power unit (P) (Fig. 27).

D
C2 D

V3
V4

V4 V4 V3

V4

Fig.27

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.22


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5.5.5 MONITORS

See the installation instructions (para. 2.2 of Part 2 of this manual) for details of how to remove the monitors
from their trolley.

5.5.6 MEDICAP 200 (OPTIONAL WITH VIDEO MEMORY)

To remove the MEDICAP 200 device:

• Remove the front cover (C2) (see paragraph 5.5.1 and Fig.21 above).
• Disconnect the cables at the back of the MEDICAP 200 device (A).
• Loosen the 2 screws (V1) and their washers.
• Extract the MEDICAP 200 device (A).

V1

Fig.28

revision 0 PART 5 page 5.23


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 05.doc
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL

6 ANNEX

6.1 CREATING A BACK-UP DISK FOR THE DIP340 VIDEO PROCESSOR

We recommend creating a ghost image disk after any significant software upgrades or changes to the
system settings (e.g. DICOM settings, network settings).

Note: You need one or more unused CDs (or one DVD) to create the ghost CD/DVD.

This procedure creates a CD/DVD containing the full image of the system HD, i.e.:
- WINDOWS XP operating system,
- video processor hardware drivers,
- system working parameters,
- DICOM and local network communication settings.

The video processor CD/DVD drive is used for this procedure (on the front of the monitor unit).

Only the “Administrator” can carry out the following operations.


Close the application and reboot the system as “Administrator” (see Part 2, para. 4.4.2).
Enter:
- User name: Administrator
- Password: dgt_IIE.17

6.1.1 CREATING A GHOST DISK USING ACRONIS TRUE IMAGE

1) Run Acronis True Image:

2) Click on “Backup and Restore” in the page that now appears.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.1


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

3) Click on “Backup”.

4) Click on “Next”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.2


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

5) Select “My Computer” and click on “Next”.

6) Select “Disk and partitions” and click on “Next”.

7) Select “Disk 1 [System (C:)]” and click on “Next”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.3


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

8) Select the location and name of the back-up file. The DVD burner should normally be selected as
the location. The figure here shows an example of the name given to the ghost file: DIP340_XXX
(where XXX is the video processor serial number).

Confirm the data and continue by clicking on “Next”.

9) Click on “Tools -> Options”.

10) Select the “Compression level” menu and set “Normal”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.4


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

11) Select the “Media components” menu and enable the first option: “Place Acronis True Image (Full
version) on media”.

12) Select the “Additional settings” menu and enable both options.
Confirm the data and continue by clicking on “OK”.

13) In the Archive Comments page you can add notes on the back-up file (e.g. system serial number
and SW release).
Confirm the data and continue by clicking on “Next”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.5


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

14) Check the settings in the summary page.


Click on “Proceed” to start the backup file creation process.

15) Insert the CD or DVD to be used as the back-up. Wait a few seconds and then click on “OK”.

16) Creation of the back-up file. The Current operation progress bar indicates the progress during
creation of this file.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.6


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
TECHNICAL MANUAL

17) Once the ghost file has been created, insert the CD/DVD in the drive again.
Click on “Retry”.

18) The burnt ghost CD/DVD is now checked. The Current operation progress bar shows the progress of
the file verification process.

19) The back-up process is complete once the back-up file has been verified.

20) Extract the DVD/CD, close the application and restart the system as “User”.

revision 0 PART 5 page 6.7


code 66 80 012 - Mti S5 06
Pagina bianca
TECHNICAL MANUAL: Annex

ACCEPTANCE TEST:

The acceptance test involves all the checks listed in the TEST SHEET below:
The test sheet should be filled in by the user:
- immediately after installing the equipment,
- during routine maintenance,
- after all extraordinary maintenance.

Code Operation Notes Result

A.1 Equipment power supply cable and connector


A.2 Monitor unit / stand cable and connector
A.3 Monitor unit / stand sheath
A.4 Footswitch cable and connector
A.5 X-ray control button cable
B.1 C-arm sliding
B.2 C-arm sliding brake
B.3 C-arm rotation
B.4 C-arm rotation brake
B.5 Horizontal C-arm movement
B.6 Horizontal C-arm movement brake
B.7 C-arm angling (wig-wag)
B.8 C-arm angling brake
B.9 Column up/down movement
B.10 Smooth movement of stand wheels
B.11 Stand wheel parking brakes
B.12 ±90° rotation of rear stand wheels
B.13 Smooth movement of monitor unit wheels
B.14 Monitor unit wheel parking brakes
B.15 Fixing of monitors
B.16 Fixing of X-ray warning light
B.17 Fixing of panels on monitor unit
B.18 Fixing of panels on stand
B.19 State of monoblock cover
B.20 State of control panel on monitor unit
B.21 State of control panel on stand
B.22 State of on/off keys on stand
C.1 Keyboard + touchpad board DIP340 only
C.2 Monitor unit power supply unit
C.3 Stand rack and boards
C.4 Monitor unit fans DIP340 only
C.5 Stand switching on
C.6 UNNAMED image frame on monitor DIP340 only
C.7 Study List frame DIP340 only
C.8 Image frame with markers on monitor SBFM only
C.9 Automatic stand initializing test
C.10 Monoblock fans
C.11 Monitor unit safety button
C.12 Stand safety button
C.13 Stand column movement
C.14 X-ray warning light
C.15 Image on monitor
C.16 Continuous fluoroscopy indication on stand
C.17 Continuous fluoroscopy indication on monitor DIP340 only
C.18 Correct dose
C.19 Collimator iris
C.20 Continuous fluoroscopy to HD indication on stand DIP340 only

revision 0 Page 1 of 2
code 66 80 012 - Mti test sheet.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL: Annex

Code Operation Notes Result

C.21 Continuous fluoroscopy to HD indication on monitor DIP340 only


C.22 Pulsed fluoroscopy indication on stand
C.23 Pulsed fluoroscopy indication on monitor DIP340 only
C.24 One shot indication on stand
C.25 One shot indication on monitor DIP340 only
C.26 MAX OP / Road Mapping indications on stand DIP340 only
C.27 MAX OP / Road Mapping indications on monitor DIP340 only
C.28 Radiography time for 40 kV, 200 mAs range: 2.6 – 3.6 s
C.29 Radiography time for 80 kV, 130 mAs range: 3.1 – 4.3 s
C.30 Radiography time for 100 kV, 100 mAs range: 3.0 – 4.1 s
C.31 Collimator indications on monitor (optional) DIP340 only
C.32 Image transfer to reference monitor DIP340 only
C.33 Dose Area Meter on stand (optional)
C.34 Dose Area meter on monitor (optional)
C.35 Laser localizer centring (optional)
C.36 Video printer (optional)
C.37 DICOM options (optional) DIP340 only
D.1 X-ray dose intensity
D.2 Automatic X-ray dose control
D.3 Grey scale
D.4 Spatial resolution
D.5 Image uniformity
D.6 Image distortion
D.7 Noise level
D.8 Min contrast
D.9 Low contrast resolution and MTF curve
D.10 I.I. tube conversion factor

Date: ……………… Operator signature: …………………………..

revision 0 Page 2 of 2
code 66 80 012 - Mti test sheet.doc

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen